The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutSnee HallCornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall – Energy Recovery April, 2017 TABLE OF CONTENTS 000003-1 SECTION 00 0003 - TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION TITLE PAGE(S) DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION 210553 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 3 211313 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 11 DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING – Not Used DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING 230513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 3 230553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 4 230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 18 230713 DUCT INSULATION 12 230900 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 20 230901 BACS COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 15 232923 VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 10 233113 METAL DUCTS 12 233300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 9 233416 CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS 6 DIVISON 26 – ELECTRICAL 260519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 5 260523 CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 9 260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 5 260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 5 260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 10 260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 7 262726 WIRING DEVICES 6 262816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 6 END OF SECTION 000003 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 www.delta-eas.com AN ISO 9001:2008 CERTIFIED COMPANY “We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations” April 14, 2017 Mr. Dale Houseknecht, Asbestos Project Coordinator Cornell University Maintenance Management 116 Humphreys Service Building Ithaca, New York 14853-3701 Re: Snee Hall (2049) 4th Floor Geochemistry Clean Room Renovation Heat Recovery Project Asbestos Bulk Sampling - Bulk Sample Report Cornell Task Authorization No. TA-58, Work Order No. 9760977 Delta Project No.: 2017.003.056 Dear Mr. Houseknecht: Enclosed, please find the Asbestos Bulk Sample Report Form, the associated Laboratory Analytical Result Sheets, and the Sample Location Drawing for the bulk sampling performed by Delta Certified Inspector Thomas P. Ferro. The sampling was performed on April 11th, 2017 and addressed suspect materials with the potential to be impacted by the Snee Hall 4th Floor Geochemistry Clean Room Renovation Heat Recovery Project. Based on a visual inspection of the affected Roof and Mezzanine areas and a review of the Project Bulletin / Drawing Set (Bulletin dated November 21st, 2016), a total of ten (10) bulk samples were collected representing five (5) homogenous materials. Two (2) of the samples collected were “Non- Friable Organically Bound” (NOB) representing one (1) suspect homogenous material. The remaining eight (8) samples were “Non-NOB’s” representing four (4) suspect Homogenous materials. Results for all samples were reported as being either “Non-Asbestos” or as “No Asbestos Detected.” It should be noted that there were no suspect materials observed in the Mezzanine with the potential to be impacted by the project. Based on the above, no asbestos containing materials are anticipated to be impacted by the Snee Hall 4th Floor Geochemistry Clean Room Renovation Heat Recovery Project. Bulk sample analysis was performed by AmeriSci New York, Inc., an independent laboratory approved / accredited by the NYS Department of Health (ELAP), the American Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA), and the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP). Analysis of all Non-Friable Organically Bound (NOB) materials was initially performed by Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) following the NYS DOH ELAP 198.6 Methodologies. If the PLM results were reported as “non-asbestos”, the sample was then analyzed by Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) following the NYS DOH ELAP 198.4 Methodology. Analysis of all Non-NOB materials was performed by Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) following the NYS DOH ELAP 198.1 Methodology. “Positive Stop” sample analysis protocol was utilized for a given homogenous material set with multiple samples and based on this; all 10 of the samples collected were analyzed. Please reference the Asbestos Bulk Sample Report Form for sample particulars and details. “We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations” DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, P.C. Page 2 of 10 AN ISO 9001:2008 CERTIFIED COMPANY I have also attached Delta Company, Personnel, and Laboratory Licenses/Certifications. If you have any questions or require any other information, please feel free to contact me at your convenience. Respectfully, DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, P.C. Stephen Prislupsky Director of Environmental Services Att: Project Paperwork “We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations” DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, P.C. Page 3 of 10 AN ISO 9001:2008 CERTIFIED COMPANY Attachment A Asbestos Bulk Sample Report Form Material Asbestos PLM Result TEM Result Bulk Sample Description / Details Type Type % Asbestos % Asbestos 2017.003.056 -01A 01 Roof Penthouse Roof, 1st Layer, Built Up Misc.Non-Asbestos ND Trace 2017.003.056 -01B 01 Roof Penthouse Roof, 1st Layer, Built Up Misc.ND ND ND 2017.003.056 -02A 02 Roof Penthouse Roof, 2nd Layer, White Paper Misc.ND ND NA 2017.003.056 -02B 02 Roof Penthouse Roof, 2nd Layer, White Paper Misc.ND ND NA 2017.003.056 -03A 03 Roof Penthouse Roof, 3rd Layer, Gypsum Board Misc.ND ND NA 2017.003.056 -03B 03 Roof Penthouse Roof, 3rd Layer, Gypsum Board Misc.ND ND NA 2017.003.056 -04A 04 Roof Penthouse Roof, 4th Layer, Isoboard Paper Backing Misc.ND ND NA 2017.003.056 -04B 04 Roof Penthouse Roof, 4th Layer, Isoboard Paper Backing Misc.ND ND NA 2017.003.058 -05A 05 Roof Penthouse Roof, Concrete Deck Misc.ND ND NA 2017.003.058 -05B 05 Roof Penthouse Roof, Concrete Deck Misc.ND ND NA TSI - Thermal System Insulation Misc - Miscellaneous Material Trace / < 1% - Non-asbestos by definition Building Code: 2049 Sample 860 Hooper Road, Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax 607.231.6640 Client: Cornell University Delta Proj. No.: 2017.003.056 Asbestos Inspector: Thomas P. Ferro HA* Number of Samples Analyzed: PLM - 10 / TEM - 2 Project: Snee Hall Heat Recovery Project Roof and Mezzanine Asbestos Bulk Sampling HA - Homogenous Area ND - No Asbestos Detected NA - Not Analyzed by Methodology NA/PS - Not Analyzed, Positive Stop Number www.delta-eas.com Floor Dates Sampling Performed: 04/11/2017 Date of Report: 4/14/2017 Laboratory: AmeriSci Labs Task Authorization: TA-58/ Work Order No.: 9760977 Number of Samples Collected: 10 Asbestos Bulk Sample Report Form Cornell University Snee Hall Heat Recovery Project Roof and Mezzanine Asbestos Bulk Sampling 1 of 1 “We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations” DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, P.C. Page 4 of 10 AN ISO 9001:2008 CERTIFIED COMPANY Attachment B Laboratory Analytical Result Sheets “We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations” DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, P.C. Page 5 of 10 AN ISO 9001:2008 CERTIFIED COMPANY Attachment C Sample Location Drawing “We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations” DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, P.C. Page 6 of 10 AN ISO 9001:2008 CERTIFIED COMPANY Attachment D Photos “We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations” DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, P.C. Page 7 of 10 AN ISO 9001:2008 CERTIFIED COMPANY HA 01 – Penthouse Roof Top Layer Built-up Roofing, Non-Asbestos HA 02 – Penthouse Roof 2nd Layer White Paper, Non-Asbestos “We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations” DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, P.C. Page 8 of 10 AN ISO 9001:2008 CERTIFIED COMPANY HA 03 – Penthouse Roof 3rd Layer Gypsum Board, Non-Asbestos HA 04 – Penthouse Roof 4th Layer Paper Backing from non-suspect foam Isoboard, Non- Asbestos “We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations” DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, P.C. Page 9 of 10 AN ISO 9001:2008 CERTIFIED COMPANY HA 05 - Penthouse Roof Concrete Roof Deck, Non-Asbestos “We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations” DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, P.C. Page 10 of 10 AN ISO 9001:2008 CERTIFIED COMPANY Attachment E Licenses and Certifications New York State – Department of Labor Division of Safety and Health License and Certificate Unit State Campus, Building 12 Albany, NY 12240 ASBESTOS HANDLING LICENSE Delta Engineers & Architects & Land Surveyors, P.C. 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 FILE NUMBER: 05-0851 LICENSE NUMBER: 29322 LICENSE CLASS: RESTRICTED DATE OF ISSUE: 09/08/2016 EXPIRATION DATE: 09/30/2017 Duly Authorized Representative – David J Chambers: This license has been issued in accordance with applicable provisions of Article 30 of the Labor Law of New York State and of the New York State Codes, Rules and Regulations (12 NYCRR Part 56). It is subject to suspension or revocation for a (1) serious violation of state, federal or local laws with regard to the conduct of an asbestos project, or (2) demonstrated lack of responsibility in the conduct of any job involving asbestos or asbestos material. This license is valid only for the contractor named above and this license or a photocopy must be prominently displayed at the asbestos project worksite. This license verifies that all persons employed by the licensee on an asbestos project in New Yor k State have been issued an Asbestos Certificate, appropriate for the type of work they perform, by the New York State Department of Labor. Eileen M. Franko, Director SH 432 (8/12) For the Commissioner of Labor NEW YORK STATE DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH WADSWORTH CENTER CERTIFICATE OF APPROVAL FOR LABORATORY SERVICE /ssued rn accardanca wilh and pursuanl lo section 502 Public Health Law of New York State Expires 12:01 AM April 01, 2018 lssued April 01, 2017 NY Lab ld Na: 11480MR. PAUL J. MUCHA AMERICA SC'ENCE TEAM NEW YORK INC 117 EAST 3OIHST NEWYORK, NY 10A16 Miscellaneous Asbestos in Friable Matarial Asbaslos in Non-Friable Material-PLM Asbestos in Non-Friablo Material-TEM is hereby APPRAVED as an Environmental Laboratory for the category ENVRANMENTAT ANATYSES SOI/O AND HAZARDOUS WASTE All app rove d subcategofl'e s a nd/ar an alyte s ar6,lslsd below : Item 198,1 of Manual EPA 600/M4/82i020 Item 198.6 of Manual (NOB by PLM) llem '198.4 of Manual Serial No.: 56034 orooerlyofthoNewYorkstatgDepartmentofHeallh, ce(iflcatosar6valldonlyattheaddrBss sfiov/n. rnusl bo conspictrously postod, and are prinl€d on sscure pap6r. Continuod accreditation depends rtrt successful ongoing participation in th8 Program. Consumars aro urged to call (5 1 8) 485-5570 to ue,,ty lhe laboratorys accredilation status. Page 1 of 1 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SNEE HALL PENTHOUSE CLEAN ROOM HEAT RECOVERY DRAWING LIST GENERAL G-001 COVER SHEET FIRE PROTECTION F-001 GENERAL INFORMATION F-101 PENTHOUSE MEZZANINE PLAN HVAC M-001 GENERAL INFORMATION M-101 PENTHOUSE & ROOF PLAN ELECTRICAL ME -601 SCHEDULES E-001 GENERAL INFORMATION E-101 PENTHOUSE & ROOF PLANS MEP ENGINEER IPD ENGINEERING ONE WEBSTER'S LANDING SYRACUSE, NEW YORK 13202 PH: 315.423.0185 FAX: 315.471.6222 LOCATION PLAN KEY PLAN SNEE HALL NORTH ' 0„ 4:" ,.,„,,',.1.- , • 1 PROJECT AREA NORTH it* , . , , v - ENGINEERING ONE WERSTERS LANDING SYRACUSE, NEW YORK 13202 314.423.0185 6 6--,;e: 1" CORNELL UNIVERSITY SNEE HALL PENTHOUSE CLEAN ROOM HEAT RECOVERY 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE ITHACA, NEW YORK 14853 A 00.00.00 MIS DATE DESCRIPTION PROJECT NO. DATE 13-7700A 04/18/2017 DRAWN 8Y CHECKED NT WFT AD DOCUMENT AND THE DESIGN SCUM. CONTAINED HEREIN REPRESENT PROPRIETARY INFORMANON OP ND ENGINEER. AND MAT NOT RE REPRODUCED NOR OlfiDloSED IN MOLE OR PO PART EN ANY PARTY RECEIVING THS DOCUME1NUNTNN/T MOP WRITTEN ROHRER, SHEET TITLE COVER SHEET SHEET NUMBER G-001 FIRE PROTECTION NOTES 1. PROVIDECOMPLETE FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM IN ACCORDANCE WITH NEW YORK STATE BUILDING CODE, NFPA 13, LOCAL CODES, CORNELL UNIVERSITY AND FM GLOBAL REQUIREMENTS. CONTRACTOR SHALL SECURE AND PAY FOR ALL PERMITS, INSPECTIONS AND APPROVALS REQUIRED BY THE AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION. COMPLETE SHOP DRAWINGS, HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS AND MATERIAL DATA SHEETS SHALL BE SUBMITTED FOR APPROVAL PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. PLANS SHALL INDICATE ALL PIPE SIZES, LOCATIONS, ELEVATIONS, SPRINKLER TYPES, EXISTING OBSTRUCTIONS, ETC. FIELD VERIFY CEILING TILE, LIGHT FIXTURE, RADIANT HEATER AND HVAC DIFFUSER LOCATIONS AS WELL AS OTHER ITEMS LOCATED WITHIN THE CEILING PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION, SPRINKLER LOCATIONS SHALL ACCOMMODATE THE EXISTING CONDITIONS. 5, THESE DRAWINGS DO NOT INDICATE ALL EXISTING. MECHANICALS, PLUMBING, ELECTRICAL AND OTHER ARCHITECTURAL FEATURES, CONTRACT SHALL INCLUDE ALL NECESSARY OFFSETS AND FITTINGS AS. REQUIRED TO PROVIDE A COMPLETE, OPERABLE AND CODE -COMPLIANT SYSTEM. COORDINATE THE SCHEDULING OF ALL WORK IN ADVANCE WITH THE OWNER OR OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE. A TWO WEEK LOOK -AHEAD SCHEDULE SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR REVIEW PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. THE FACILITY I5 AN ACTIVE FIRE STATION AND WILL REMAIN OCCUPIED FOR THE DURATION OF THE PROJECT. ALL SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR NORMAL OPERATION OF THE FACILITY SHALL REMAIN IN PLACE AND FUNCTIONAL AT ALL TIMES UNLESS OTHERWISE AUTHORIZED BY THE OWNER IN WRITING. ALL CORRIDOR d. STAIRWAY WALL PENETRATIONS SHALL BE FIRE -STOPPED, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL CLEAN UP AND VACUUM WITH A HEPA FILTERED VACUUM EACH DAY AS THE WORK PROGRESSES. 8. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO REMOVE AND REPLACE ALL CEILING TILES, PROTECT ALL FLOORS & WALLS AND TO PROTECT ALL ITEMS WITHIN THE WORK AREA THROUGHOUT THE CONSTRUCTION PHASE, ANY ITEM DAMAGED SHALL BE REPAIRED TO I78 ORIGINAL CONDITION OR REPLACED WITH NEW. PRIME & PAINT ALL NEW EXPOSED SPRINKLER PIPE. PREPARE SURFACE AND PROVIDE ONE COAT PRIMER, TWO COATS FINISH. 10. PROVIDE MSOS AND PRODUCT DATA SHEETS TO 745 OWNER FOR ALL PAINTS, SOLVENTS, ADHESIVES, CLEANERS AND SEALANTS TO BE USED ON THE PROJECT. 11. STAGING OF WORK AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS SHALL BE LIMITED TO AREAS DIRECTED BY OWNER AND SHALL NOT OBSTRUCT NORMAL OPERATIONS OR INGRESS/EGRESS TO THE BUILDING. 12. REFERENCE TO CORNELL DESIGN STANDARD 15300 AND PROJECT SPECIFICATION SECTION 211313 FOR CONTINUATION OF WORK. MAXIMUM DISTANCE BETWEEN HANGERS STEEL PIPE EXCEPT THREADED LIGHTWALL THREADED LIGHTWALL STEEL PIPE 3/4" N/A 3/4" N/A 1" 12-0 P' 12-0 1-1/4" 12-0 1-1/4" 12-0 1-1/2" 15-0 1-1/2" 12-0 2" 15-0 2" 12-0 2-1/2" 15-0 2-1/2" 12-0 3" 15-0 3" 12-0 3-1/2" 15-0 3-1/2" N/A. 4" 15-0 4" N/A —SOR— E SOR—E 4 4 SYMBOLS LIST POINT OF CONNECTION LIMIT OF REMOVAL PIPING/EQUIPMENT TO BE REMOVED PIPING/EQUIPMENT TO REMAIN DIRECTION OF FLOW SPRINKLER PIPING TYPICAL SPRINKLER PIPING CAP NEW SEMI -RECESSED SPRINKLER HEAD UPRIGHT SPRINKLER HEAD FLUSHING. CONNECTION ACCEPTABLE SPRINKLER HEAD LOCATION WITHIN CEILING TILE (TYP 32 HEAD LOCATION DETAIL NOT TO SCALE ANC// RDFO H DROP-IN ANCHOR FOR HOLLOW MARE AND POURED MATERIALS 36" THREADED ROD ADJUSTABLE -- LOOP HANGER = \� HANGER 36" TOP BEAM CLAMP 8/" THREADED ROD ADJUSTABLE LOOP PIPE HANGER DETAIL NOT TO SCALE. ENGINEERING ONE WEBSTERS LANDING SYRACUSE, NEW YORK 13202 315.423.0185 UNIVERSIT J J W Z 0 0 SNEE HALL PENTHOUSE CLEAN ROOM HEAT RECOVERY 8) UJ 00 O NZJ < O� = Q 12 7 F A 00.00.00 MK DATE DESCRIPTION PROJECT NO. 13-7700A DATE 04/18/2017 DRAWN BY WFT CHECKED BY AD L`pDOCUMENT VNTHOUT CRIOR Mai. CONSENT SHEET TITLE GENERAL INFORMATION SHEEP NUMBEp F-001 0- - DE -51" New UPRIGHT HEAD ITYP. 21 MATCH EXIST. /ta REMOVE FP TO ALLOW FOR -- INSTALL OF NEW DUCT FP DN 0-26x28 UP TO F-4 ON ROOF 0 - GS&GR 5046 )1.,A.-01807,2040.1 8 1 _05 A' 4° W 4 RHC -1 60x90 RELIEF AIR 0A-54,00 DN—'' 05-24x24 8-28x28 DN iirirmicar.mdsrAwrir ArAr °PENTHOUSE MEZZANINE PLAN SCALE: 1/.4. NORTH ENGINEERING ONE WEBSTERS LANDING SYRACUSE, NEW YORK 13202 315A23,0105 Or 9 torAPRI30' 4,0 S141 - T RECOVERY A 00.00.00 MK DATE DESCRIPTION PROJECT NO. DATE 13-7700A 04/18/2017 DRAWN SY WFT CHECKED SY AD -WS DOCUMENT AND iME DM. SOLUTIONS CONTAINED HEREIN REPRESENT PROPRIETARY INFORMATION Or grgX,rg A4T,Z74=2. OCCUMENT WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN CONS., SHEET TITLE PENTHOUSE MEZZANINE PLAN SHEET NUMBER F-101 AA0 - MANUAL VOLUME DAMPER AUTOMATIC AIR .DAMPER - FIRE DAMPER FLEXIBLE CONNECTION ►i. - SUPPLY ELBOW UP - SUPPLY ELBOW ON - EXHAUST/RETURN ELBOW UP - EXHAUST/RETURN ELBOW ON - ROUND ELBOW UP {I II - ROUND ELBOW DN I J - CENTERED TRANSITION )i} - OFFSET TRANSITION SQUARE TO ROUND TRANSITION SLOPE IN DUCT - -t - ACOUSTICALLY LINED DUCTWORK - RADIUS ELBOW-DOUBLECINO SYMBOLS LIST - MITERED ELBOW WITH TURNING VANES - DOUBLELINE - 45 DEGREE LEADING EDGE BRANCH TAKEOFF-DOUBLELINE - BRANCH TAKEOFF 90 DEGREE - BRANCH TAKEOFF 45 DEGREE - DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR - TEMPERATURE SENSOR - AIR FLOW INDICATOR - 4- WAY CEILING SUPPLY 014405ER - CEILING EXHAUST/RETURN REGISTER - PIPE CAP - RADIANT CEILING PANEL 1--�� FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR >( I PIPE ANCHOR 11-4 4-11 - PIPE BREAK 2 B` 1 PIPE PLOW ARROW NEW PIPING, DUCTWORK, AND EQUIPMENT - EXISTING TO REMAIN PIPING, DUCTWORK, AND EQUIPMENT 7 -2 -27 -I -a-+-2 - PIPING, DUCTWORK, ANO EQUIPMENT FOR REMOVAL 2--�� - BALL VALVE 2-1/1--7 - CHECK VALVE 2 61 i - BALANCING VALVE - POSITIVE SHUTOFF 2 RI 2 - CONTROL VALVE - 2 WAY - RELIEF VALVE 50 i - GATE VALVE / HIGH PERFORMANCE BUTTERFLY VALVE A 1X1 d - GLOBE VALVE - THREE-WAY CONTROL VALVE - DRAIN VALVE WITH HOSE 518 - UNION 7 4d i STRAINER WITH SLOWDOWN 7--E>--+ - REDUCER OR INCREASER - BRANCH FROM BOTTOM OF PIPE - BRANCH FROM TOP OF PIPE - PIPE ELBOW DN 0 - PIPE ELBOW UP ICL - GAUGE WITH BALL VALVE anv AUTOMATIC AIR VENT WMv MANUAL ASR VENT / i - THERMOMETER -KEYED NOTE - KEYED NOTE - POINT OF NEW CONNECTION - LIMIT OF REMOVAL GENERAL NOTES: 1, DRAWINGS ARE DIAGRAMMATIC AND INDICATE GENERAL ARRANGEMENT OF SYSTEMS AND WORK INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT, IT I5 NOT INTENDED TO SPECIFY OR SHOW EVERY OFFSET, FITTIN0 OR COMPONENT; HOWEVER, CONTRACT DOCUMENTS REQUIRE COMPONENTS. AND MATERIALS WHETHER OR NOT INDICATED OR SPECIFICALLY SPECIFIED TO MAKE THE SYSTEMS BEING INSTALLED COMPLETE, CODE COMPLIANT, TESTED AND OPERATIONAL 2, CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY ALL LOCATIONS, DIMENSIONS AND .ELEVATIONS PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. 3. ALL MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, METHODS OF INSTALLATION, REMOVALS AND DISPOSAL SHALL. BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE STANDARDS, REGULATIONS, CODES, ORDINANCES, AND LAWS OF LOCAL, STATE, AND FEDERAL GOVERNMENTS, AND OTHER AUTHORITIES THAT HAVE LAWFUL JURISDICTION, 4. PERFORM WORK, PROVIDE MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT FOR SYSTEMS SHOWN, SPECIFIED AND DESCRIBED ON DRAWINGS. COMPLETELY COORDINATE ALL TRADES OF THIS CONTRACT AND PROVIDE COMPLETE AND FULLY FUNCTIONAL INSTALLATION, ALL WORK IN THIS SET T0. BE COMPLETED UNDER THI5 CONTRACT, UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. 5. PROTECT ALL .EXISTING AND NEW BUILDING ELEMENTS INSTALLED BY OTHER CONTRACTS) FROM DAMAGE, CONTRACTOR SHALL RESTORE ALL DAMAGED ELEMENTS TO ORIGINAL OR BETTER CONDITION, 6, WORK SHALL BE EXECUTED IN A WORKMANLIKE MANNER AND SHALL PRESENT NEAT, RECTILINEAR APPEARANCE WHEN COMPLETED. MAINTAIN MAXIMUM HEAD ROOM AT ALL TIMES. DO NOT RUN PIPES, DUCTS, AND CONDUIT EXPOSED. UNLESS SHOWN AND NOTED TO BE EXPOSED ON DRAWINGS. 7. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL WORK RELATED TO ISOLATING, SHUTTING DOWN, DRAINING, FILLING AND TESTING SYSTEMS TO ALLOW FOR COMPLETION OF WORK. INTERRUPTIONS TO EXISTING SERVICES AND SYSTEMS SHALL BE AS SHORT AS POSSIBLE AND AT A. TIME AND DURATION APPROVED BY THE OWNER AND UTILITY AS APPLICABLE, INCLUDE ALL PREMIUM TIME ASSOCIATED WITH INTERRUPTIONS, ALL SYSTEM INTERRUPTIONS SHALL BE SCHEDULED WITH OWNER, UTILITY AND COORDINATED WITH OTHER TRADE: WORK. 8. COORDINATE. ALL MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT WITH CORNELL DESIGN STANDARDS AND FM GLOBAL REQUIREMENTS, ENGINEERING ONE WEBSTERS LANDING SYRACUSE, NEW YORK13202 315.423.0155 (/) W o Z 0 D J Q w W U Z- • Q = O O U Zw wZ CO El RECOVERY 15 N 55 >7_ 0CC0 WO (rq W J Z oa =U 01 A 00.00.00 MK DATE DESCRIPTION PROJECT NO. 13-7700A DATE DRAWN BY 04/1 B/2017 CHECKED BY WF-1- AD FTAD IPO ENGINEERING AND MAT NO, BE REPRODUCED NOR 00CUMENT VNTH011i PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT SHEET TITLE GENERAL INFORMATION SHEET NUMBER M-001 488950147055 AAD AUTOMATIC AIR DAMPER GAL GALLON ACCU AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNIT GALV GALVANIZED AD ACCESS DOOR GPM GALLONS PER MINUTE AFG ABOVE FINISHED GRADE HC HVAC CONTRACTOR AMP AMPERAGE HD HEAD ANSI AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS HGS HOT GLYCOL SUPPLY AP ACCESS PANEL HP HORSEPOWER ARI AIR CONDITIONING AND REFRIGERATION HSR HOT GLYCOL RETURN AS AIR SEPARATOR HWR HOT WATER RETURN ASHRAE AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING ENGINEER HWS HOT WATER SUPPLY AIME AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS HX HEAT EXCHANGER B BOILER MA MIXED AIR BHP BRAKE HORSEPOWER MAT MIXED AIR TEMPERATURE BTU BRITISH THERMAL UNIT MAU MAKE-UP AIR UNIT BTUH BRITISH THERMAL UNIT PER HOUR MAX MAXIMUM CC COOLING COIL MBH 1.000 BTU/HR CFM CUBIC FEET PER MINUTE MCA MINIMUM BRANCH CIRCUIT AMPACITY CHEM CHEMICAL TREATMENT MD MOTORIZED DAMPER CONC CONCRETE MIN MINIMUM CORD CONDENSATE NC NORMALLY CLOSED D DRAIN NO NORMALLY OPEN dB DECIBEL(S) NOM NOMINAL DB DRYSULB TEMPERATURE NTS NOT TO SCALE dB DECIBEL(S) OA OUTSIDE AIR DB DRVBULB TEMPERATURE P PUMP DDC DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL(SYSTEM) p PUMP DEG DEGREE PD PRESSURE DROP DIA DIAMETER PRV PRESSURE REGULATING VALVE DN DOWN PSIG POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH (GAUGE) dP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE PVC POLYVINYLCHLORIDE DP DEWPOINT TEMPERATURE RA RETURN AIR EA EXHAUST AIR RECT RECTANGULAR EAT ENTERING AIR TEMPERATURE RH RELATIVE HUMIDITY EF EXHAUST FAN RHC REHEAT COIL EG EXHAUST GRILLE RPM REVOLUTIONS PER MINUTE EL EC ELECTRIC I ELECTRICAL RV RELIEF VALVE EMS ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 0-9 SUPPLY AIR DIFFUSER/GRILLE/REGISTER ENT ENTERING SA SUPPLY AIR ESP EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE SAT SUPPLY AIR TEMPERATURE ET EXPANSION TANK SF SUPPLY FAN EWI ENTERING WATER TEMPERATURE SMACNA SHEET METAL AND AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS NATIONAL ASSOCIATION E EXHAUST SP STATIC PRESSURE F FAHRENHEIT TAB TESTING, ADJUSTING, BALANCE FD FIRE DAMPER TSP TOTAL STATIC PRESSURE FPM FEET PER MINUTE TYP TYPICAL FRP FIBER REINFORCED POLYESTER UNO UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE FT FEET VD VOLUME DAMPER FT WC FEET OF WATER COLUMN VFD VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE FT -LB FOOT-POUND WB AT WETBUL5 FV FACE VELOCITY TEMPERATURE DIFFERENCE EV FACE VELOCITY G GAS GA GAUGE GENERAL NOTES: 1, DRAWINGS ARE DIAGRAMMATIC AND INDICATE GENERAL ARRANGEMENT OF SYSTEMS AND WORK INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT, IT I5 NOT INTENDED TO SPECIFY OR SHOW EVERY OFFSET, FITTIN0 OR COMPONENT; HOWEVER, CONTRACT DOCUMENTS REQUIRE COMPONENTS. AND MATERIALS WHETHER OR NOT INDICATED OR SPECIFICALLY SPECIFIED TO MAKE THE SYSTEMS BEING INSTALLED COMPLETE, CODE COMPLIANT, TESTED AND OPERATIONAL 2, CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY ALL LOCATIONS, DIMENSIONS AND .ELEVATIONS PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. 3. ALL MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, METHODS OF INSTALLATION, REMOVALS AND DISPOSAL SHALL. BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE STANDARDS, REGULATIONS, CODES, ORDINANCES, AND LAWS OF LOCAL, STATE, AND FEDERAL GOVERNMENTS, AND OTHER AUTHORITIES THAT HAVE LAWFUL JURISDICTION, 4. PERFORM WORK, PROVIDE MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT FOR SYSTEMS SHOWN, SPECIFIED AND DESCRIBED ON DRAWINGS. COMPLETELY COORDINATE ALL TRADES OF THIS CONTRACT AND PROVIDE COMPLETE AND FULLY FUNCTIONAL INSTALLATION, ALL WORK IN THIS SET T0. BE COMPLETED UNDER THI5 CONTRACT, UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. 5. PROTECT ALL .EXISTING AND NEW BUILDING ELEMENTS INSTALLED BY OTHER CONTRACTS) FROM DAMAGE, CONTRACTOR SHALL RESTORE ALL DAMAGED ELEMENTS TO ORIGINAL OR BETTER CONDITION, 6, WORK SHALL BE EXECUTED IN A WORKMANLIKE MANNER AND SHALL PRESENT NEAT, RECTILINEAR APPEARANCE WHEN COMPLETED. MAINTAIN MAXIMUM HEAD ROOM AT ALL TIMES. DO NOT RUN PIPES, DUCTS, AND CONDUIT EXPOSED. UNLESS SHOWN AND NOTED TO BE EXPOSED ON DRAWINGS. 7. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL WORK RELATED TO ISOLATING, SHUTTING DOWN, DRAINING, FILLING AND TESTING SYSTEMS TO ALLOW FOR COMPLETION OF WORK. INTERRUPTIONS TO EXISTING SERVICES AND SYSTEMS SHALL BE AS SHORT AS POSSIBLE AND AT A. TIME AND DURATION APPROVED BY THE OWNER AND UTILITY AS APPLICABLE, INCLUDE ALL PREMIUM TIME ASSOCIATED WITH INTERRUPTIONS, ALL SYSTEM INTERRUPTIONS SHALL BE SCHEDULED WITH OWNER, UTILITY AND COORDINATED WITH OTHER TRADE: WORK. 8. COORDINATE. ALL MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT WITH CORNELL DESIGN STANDARDS AND FM GLOBAL REQUIREMENTS, ENGINEERING ONE WEBSTERS LANDING SYRACUSE, NEW YORK13202 315.423.0155 (/) W o Z 0 D J Q w W U Z- • Q = O O U Zw wZ CO El RECOVERY 15 N 55 >7_ 0CC0 WO (rq W J Z oa =U 01 A 00.00.00 MK DATE DESCRIPTION PROJECT NO. 13-7700A DATE DRAWN BY 04/1 B/2017 CHECKED BY WF-1- AD FTAD IPO ENGINEERING AND MAT NO, BE REPRODUCED NOR 00CUMENT VNTH011i PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT SHEET TITLE GENERAL INFORMATION SHEET NUMBER M-001 SUPPLY FAN SCHEDULE ENGINEERING ONE WEBSTERS LANDING SYRACUSE, NEW 00636 53202 310 423.0185 UNIT No. LOCATION SERVICE TYPE GEM SP. BLADE TYPE FAN RPM DRIVE MOTOR DESIGN EQUIPMENT REMARKS RPM HP BHP VOLTS PHASE STARTER SF -1 ROOF RHC -1 INTAKE 9003 1.5 EC 776 BELT 1725 75 5.36 460 3 VFD GREENHECK SAR-110 1, 2.3,4 REMARKS: 1. PROVIDE ROOF CURB 2. WASHABLE METAL FILTER 3. AUTOMATIC DAMPER A PROVIDE DISCONNECT SWITCH KEYED NOTES: INSTALL AUTOMATIC AIR DAMPER IN EXISTING OUTDOOR AIR DUCTOWRK. BACnet/ARCNET OR BACHAMMSTP AV, POWER IKW/ AV: SPEED (RPM) OUTDOOR AIR GENERAL NOTES: SA 440 t AUTOMATIC AIR DAMPERS SHAL HAVE A MAX LEAKAGE OF 4 crwsr 34 0 IN WC. G906357 66 APPJED MASTIC - MIT& CAP OR C6UNIEREIA31I630 WOOD NAILER INMATES PREPAR&CATED CURB BY HAAG BONDING 8136155363 63 ROOF MEMBRANE DOA FASTENING PLATE. '2' 02 MAX WELDED BEAM EXISTING ROGERAG MEMBRANE EXISTING:h. OVERIATAION BOARD 563111630 6' HIGH CONCRETE OJRB, MHERE APPLICABLE REARM ROOFING 63 INSUIATION WHERE REOURED TO WAIL. k MECHANIC& WWI I. COORDINATE WITH MECHANICAL UNIT MANUFACTURER IINCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO DIMENSIONS, STRUCTURAL SUPPORT POSITIONING, CURB DETAILING, DUCT CONNECTIONS, ETC...1. 2, WHEN REMOVALS ARE COMPLETE, PATCH ALL HOLES AND REPAIR ALL DAMAGE 70 EXISTING CONSTRUCTION. LEAVE ALL SURPACES SMOOTH, LEVEL, PLUMB, ALIGNED WITH ADJACENT SURFACES AND READY TO ACCEPT NEW FINISHES. 3. THE EXISTING ROOF IS MANUFACTURED BY TREMCO AND IS CURRENTLY UNDER WARRANTY. ANY MODIFICATIONS TO THE ROOF MUST BE DONE BY TREMCO APPROVED CONTRACTOR. COORDINATE ROOF WARRANTY WITH TRENICO, WEATHERMASTER WARRANTY 1114389, FACILITY CODE 2049, ATTN CHRIS PASQUALE 607-723-3222 EXT 204, 4. SAWCUT AND REMOVE EXISTING CONCRETE ROOF DECK IWAFFLE SLAB), INSULATION AND MEMBRANE AS NECESSARY TO COMPLETE NEW CONSTRUCTION, 5. INSTALL Roor CURB AND PLASHING PER MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATION. SUPPLY FAN CONTROL. SCALE NOT TO SCALE SEQUENCE OF OPERATION GENERAL INTERLOCK SA AAD WITH SF -1 MED. WHEN SF -I IS ON, SA AAD IS OPEN, WHEN SP -I IS OFF, SA PAD IS CLOSED WHEN ANY ONE 0) AIR HANDLER IS ENABLED AND THE RHC PUMP IS ENABLED, FAN IS ON AND OA AAD IS CLOSED. WHEN 63416 PUMP IS OFF, FAN IS OFF AND OA AAD DAMPER IS OPEN PROVIDE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSOR ACROSS RI1C-1, 5F-1 SHALL MAINTAIN DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SETPOINT (ADJ.). ADJUST SETPOINT AS REQUIRED TO PROVIDE REQUIRED AIRFLOW. P.T. 2118 BLOCANG k 5601 AS REQUIRED Exrsmc. CONCEIT DECK (wvra am) • I A' EXISDNG REINFORCED CONCRETE ota 43IST5 (WAFFLE SLAB) SLAB CORE -DRILL DETAIL 1 VT.= 1.-0r GENERAL NOTES: ALL SLAB PENETRATIONS SHALL BE LOCATED IN THE SHALLOW PARTS OF THE WAFFLE SLAB SYSTEM (APPROX. 4" THICK/. CONTRACTOR SHALL USE A REBAR METeR TO LOCATE STEEL REINFORCING PRIOR TO CORE-DR1LLING. ADJUST CORE -DRILL LOCATION TO AVOID AS MUCH REBAR AS POSSIBLE. 60x30 RELIEF AIR r 50416 DN 50926 BELOW 06-46414 OA -481124 (11,0" 63003 EQUIPMENT rt SUPPORTS HEAT RECOVERY FAN F-3 104 ON - I SECTION E-261,2 UP TO F-4 ON ROOF 601130 RELIEF AIR 06054x30 DN 0A -24x2.4 2-28928 DR F ----- -1 [------1 [ SAM/CUT/CORE-DRILL HOLE I [ [ IN CONCRETE WAFFLE SLAB FOR 28x28 HVAC DUCT 28x28 DN I AWCUT OPENING IN CONCRETE WAFFLE SLAB OR 28.'48" DUCT °PENTHOUSE MEZZANINE PLAN -HVAC SCALE 1/1, • I' 0' NORTH °PENTHOUSE ROOF STRUCTURAL PLAN SCALE: 1,0 - NORTH ROOFPLAN - HVAC - ,,,.1 • ,..,„ NORTH ENGINEERING ONE WEBSTERS LANDING SYRACUSE, NEW 00636 53202 310 423.0185 01.S.Sk1,,,, t ,o016 L1 ' 11' t[9. t -70.111r. 464,.. , 41-TA.-Wialtiftr 102.1A1065R,11:Y CORNELL UNIVERSITY SNEE HALL PENTHOUSE CLEAN ROOM HEAT RECOVERY 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE - ITHACA, NEW YORK 14853 1 05.30.17 REVISION mK DATE DESCRIPTION PROJECT NO. 13-7700A DATE 05/25/2017 DRAWN BY WFT CHECKED BY AD THIS DOCUMLNI MU rm DE.. SOL... CONIAINE, HtRGIN RE:113,,SENI PROVRIOARY IN,OHAi.ON Of 1,,t4GINEtRING AND MAT NO, BE REPRODUCE, NOR DISCLOSLO Iry WHO, L. OR WPM° SY ANY PAR, titrtIJING,H,S 00CUMNI WIIMCW,MOR WHIrrt14 CONS./ SHEET TITLE PENTHOUSE & ROOF PLAN SHEET NUMBER M'"101 :_. . IL_. NORMAL POWER CIRCUIT NUMB REFER TO DRAWING SPECIFIC NOTES FOR ASSOCIATED PANELBOARD NORMAL POWER CIRCUIT NUMBER REFER TO DRAWING SPECIFIC NOTES FOR ASSOCIATED PANELBOARD 24 AC' R GPI 24 MOUNTING HEIGHT, DEVICE TYPE, AND ANY OTHER DEVICE SPECIFIC INFORMATION FIXTURE TYPE 24.1"---- 'CD SWITCH LEG HOME -RUN FROM DEVICE TO INDICATED PANELBOARD/CIRCUIT NOTE: PROVIDE QUANTITIES OF CONDUCTORS AND RACEWAYS REQUIRED, FOR EQUIPMENT SHOWN ON. PLANS, MINIMUM TRADE SIZE CONDUCTOR SHALL BE W2 AWG. MINIMUM TRADE SIZE RACEWAY SHALL BE 3/4". THE USE OF .SHARED NEUTRALS IN LIGHTING AND RECEPTACLE BRANCH CIRCUITS IS PROHIBITED. PROVIDE SEPARATE NEUTRAL AND GROUND FOR EVERY CIRCUIT. BRANCH CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION (EMERGENCY POWER). EMERGENCY POWER CIRCUIT NUMBER REFER TO DRAWING SPECIFIC NOTES FOR ASSOCIATED PANELBOARD EM -24 AC' RGFI 24 EMERGENCY POWER CIRCUIT NUMBER REFER TO DRAWING SPECIFIC NOTES FOR ASSOCIATED PANELBOARD MOUNTING HEIGHT, DEVICE TYPE, AND ANY OTHER DEVICE SPECIFIC INFORMATION FIXTURE TYPE SWITCH LEG HOME -RUN FROM DEVICE TO INDICATED PANELBOARD/CIRCUIT NOTE: PROVIDE QUANTITIES OF CONDUCTORS AND RACEWAYS REQUIRED, FOR EQUIPMENT SHOWN ON PLANS. MINIMUM TRADE SIZE CONDUCTOR SHALL BE C2 AWG. MINIMUM. TRADE SIZE RACEWAY SHALL BE 3/44 THE USE OF SHARED NEUTRALS IN LIGHTING AND RECEPTACLE BRANCH CIRCUITS IS PROHIBITED. PROVIDE SEPARATE NEUTRAL AND GROUND FOR EVERY CIRCUIT. A AC AFF AHU A/V AWG AU BKR C CB CKT CLG DEMO DTL DWG EA EC AMPERE - ABOVE COUNTER - ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR - AIR HANDLING UNIT - AUDIO/VISUAL - AMERICAN WIRE GUAGE - AT UNIT - BREAKER - CONDUIT - CIRCUIT BREAKER - CIRCUIT - CEILING - DEMOLISH/DEMOLITION - DETAIL - DRAWING - EACH - ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR EF EM EX EXT FA FL FLA FLUOR GC GPI GND HP HVAC KVA KW LTG MCA ABBREVIATONS EXHAUST FAN EMERGENCY EXISTING - EXTERIOR FIRE ALARM FLOOR FULL LOAD AMPS FLUORESCENT GENERAL CONTRACTOR GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER - GROUND - HORSEPOWER - HEATING VENTILATION 6 AIR CONDITIONING KILOVOLT AMPS KILOWATTS LIGHTING MINIMUM CIRCUIT AMPS MCB MDP NF NIC NTS OC P PNL PRI SEC SW TEL TV TYP UNO V XFMR MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER MAIN DISTRIBUTION PANEL - NON-FUSED - NOT IN CONTRACT - NOT TO SCALE - ON CENTER - POLE - PANEL - PRIMARY SECONDARY SWITCH TELEPHONE TELEVISION TYPICAL - UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE - VOLT - TRANSFORMER NOTE: ABBREVATIONS MAY OR MAY NOT USE PERIODS, EXAMPLE AIRF, OR AFF SYMBOLS LIST GENERAL SYMBOLS: ® KEYED NOTE RLIGHT LINE -WEIGHT INDICATES EXISTING DEVICES/EQUIPMENT TO REMAIN Aga, HEAVY LINE -WEIGHT INDICATES TO PROVIDE DEVICES/EQUIPMENT AS NEW ofiail HEAVY LINE -WEIGHT WITH HASH MARKS i INDICATES EXISTING DEVICES/EQUIPMENT TO BE REMOVED • INDICATES CONNECTION TO EXISTING 1(y1ER) 1ERP NEXT TO LIGHT LINE -WEIGHT INDICATES EXISTING DEVt ES/EQUIPMENT TO BE REMOVED AND RELOCATED. REFER TO DEFINITIONS FOR INFORMATION INE) IRE)' NEXT TO LIGHT LINE -WEIGHT INDICATES EXISTING DEVICES/EQUIPMENT TO BE REINSTALLED, REFER TO DEFINITIONS FOR INFORMATION POWER SYMBOLS: *Q DUPLEX RECEPTACLE 1T QUAD RECEPTACLE Aq T W CONFIGURATIONSPECIALRECEPASACLE INDICAT(NEMAED) `' *1 MOTOR CONNECTION (REFER TO EQUIPMENT CONTROL SCHEDULED 4- ELECTRICAL CONNECTION CONTACTOR LiDISCONNECT JUNCTION BOX u DISCONNECT SWITCH (NON-FUSED) 121 DISCONNECT SWITCH (FUSED) ® VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE PUSH BUTTON 208V PANELBOARD (RECESSED) 208V PANELBOARD (SURFACE) T 480V PANELBOARD (RECESSED) MID 480V PANELBOARD (SURFACE) LIGHTING SYMBOLS: (REFER TO LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE) CR LIGHT SWITCH OSd - OCCUPANCY SENSOR -TYPE SWITCH (REFER TO OCCUPANCY SENSOR SCHEDULE) c,b,c - INDICATES SWITCH LEG' CEILING OCCUPANCY SENSOR CR - INDICATES SENSOR TYPE (REFER TO OCCUPANCY SENSOR SCHEDULE) QFE 2,4' CEILING MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURE, F# INDICATES TYPE. F4 2'x4' CEILING MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURE CONNECTED TO EMERGENCY CIRCUIT, Ft INDICATES TYPE, 2'x4' CEILING MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURE, Ft INDICATES TYPE. Ft Px4' CEILING MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURE, 55 INDICATES TYPE. 'A..," WALL. MOUNTED FIXTURE, Ft INDICATES 6=11 TYPE, TELEPHONE SYMBOLS' fik WALL TELEPHONE OUTLET (RACEWAYS 6 BOXES - REFER TO DRAWING 6-5011 FIRE ALARM SYMBOLS. Ka AUDIO/VISUAL SIGNALING DEVICE Ka VISUAL SIGNALING DEVICE ® SMOKE DETECTOR • HEAT DETECTOR ® DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR ® REMOTE INDICATION S TEST STATION ® CONTROL PANEL (HEIGHTS ARE A.F.F. TO CENTER 05 DEVICE} RECEPTACLES: RECEPTACLE ABOVE COUNTER (AC): WALL PHONE OUTLET: LIGHT SWITCH: FIRE ALARM NOTIFICATION DEVICE: 18" 8" ABOVE BACKSPLASH 44" 44" 83" DEFINjTIONS (ER) • UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, (ER) INCLUDES THE FOLLOWING WORK: DISCONNECT AND REMOVE EXISTING EQUIPMENT. RETAIN EXISTING EQUIPMENT FOR REINSTALLATION, EXISTING ASSOCIATED CIRCUITRY REMAINS FOR RECONNECTION. .PREPARE EXISTING CIRCUITRY FOR RECONNECTION TO RELOCATED EQUIPMENT. IRE) UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, (RE) INCLUDES THE FOLLOWING WORK: REINSTALL EXISTING EQUIPMENT AT INDICATED LOCATION. RECONNECT EXISTING CIRCUITRY, RECONNECT EXISTING CIRCUITRY = MODIFY AND EXTEND EXISTING WIRING AND CONDUITS AS REQUIRED TO RECONNECT CIRCUITRY TO ELECTRICAL DEVICE, PROVIDE NECESSARY JUNCTION BOXES, EXTENSION BOXES, SPLICES, RACEWAYS, WIRING, CONNECTORS, ETC, AS REQUIRED. CIRCUITRY • UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, CIRCUITRY INCLUDES, BUT IS NOT LIMITED TO, WIRING, OUTLETS BOXES, JUNCTION BOXES, RELAYS, WIREMOLD, SURFACE MOUNTED RACEWAY, CONDUITS, CONTROL DEVICES, ETC, OWNER = CORNELL UNIVERSITY DRAWINGS 6-001 8 E-002 NOTE UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, ALL ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS, ABBREVIATIONS, NOTES, DEFINITIONS, ETC, SHOWN ON DRAWINGS E-001 & E-002 APPLY TO ALL ELECTRICAL 'E' DRAWINGS, ENGINEERING ONE WEBSTERS LANDING SYRACUSE, NEW YORK 13202 315.423.0185 J J 2 w w z 0) >- W 0 w w 2 2 0 0z w J U W 0) 0 1- z w 0 A 00.00.00 DATE DESCRIPTION PROJECT N0 13-7700A DATE DRAWN BY CHECKED BY 04/18/2017 WFT AD THIS 1,0CUMENT AND 'THE DESIGN SOLUTIONS CONTAINED HEREIN REPRESENT PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF ,PD ENGIN... ANL/ MAY NO* REPROD.ED NOR DSCLOSED IN WHOLE OP IN PART BY. ON PART, RECE,ING THIS SHEET TITLE GENERAL INFORMATION SHEET NUMBER E-001 GENERAL NOTES IAPPLICABLE TO THIS DRAWING ONLYI' A. REFER TO DRAWING 8-001 FOR ADDITIONAL ELECTRICAL INFORMATION. 0. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, PROVIDE 2-012 + 812 GND IN 3/4" 0 FOR 1200 RECEPTACLE CIRCUITS. PROVIDE 2-810 410 8142 IN 3/4"C FOR 120V RECEPTACLE CIRCUITS GREATER THAN 100' IN LENGTH TO PANELBOARD. C. THE EXISTING ROOF IS MANUFACTURED BY TREMCO AND IS CURRENTLY UNDER WARRANTY. ANY MODIFICATIONS TO THE ROOF MUST BE DONE BY TREMCO APPROVED CONTRACTOR. COORDINATE ROOF WARRANTY WITH TREMCO, WEATHERMASTER WARRANTY # 114389, FACILITY CODE 2049, ATTN CHRIS PASQUALE 607-723-3222 EXT 204 FOR AHU-4 DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR FOR AHU-4 AIR HANDLING UNIT 'AHU-4' KEYED NOTES AAPPLCCABLE TO TH15 DRAWING ONLY1. 01 EXISTING 4800, 3 PHASE PANELBOARD 'HLPA'. PROVIDE ONE Ill 20A/3P 0/15 IN PANELBOARD FOR SUPPLY FAN 'SP -1', PROVIDE LIGHTNING PROTECTION EQUIPMENT FOR NEW ROOF MOUNTED HVAC EQUIPMENT, NEW HVAC EQUIPMENT INCLUDES, BUT IS NOT LIMITED T0, 0 DUCTWORK, DUCT SUPPORTS, EXHAUST FANS, ETC. REFER TO LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM NOTES ON THIS DRAWING FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. PROVIDE UNISTRUT STEEL SUPPORT FRAME (LADDER STYLE INTERMEDIATE FRAMING), AND 3/4" PAINTED COX PLYWOOD BACKBOARD (COLOR: GRAY), TO 03 SUPPORT AND MOUNT ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. PROVIDE MINIMUM OF (2) VERTICAL SUPPORT BASES. SECURE SUPPORT BASES TO STRUCTURE AS REQUIRED, REMOVE EXISTING ABANDONED CONDUIT 70 .ACCOMMODATE FAN .AND DUCTWORK INSTALLATION. TO MAINTAIN DRAWING CLARITY, EXISTING CONDUIT HAS NOT O BEEN SHOWN (FIELD VE6107). _ . 5 ,, . .. CONTRACTOR MUST EMPLOY CERTIFIED LIGHTNING PROTECTION CONTRACTOR Nl. AUTHORIZED) TO PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING WORK: • FURNISH AND INSTALL LIGHTNING PROTECTION COMPONENTS FOR ROOF MOUNTED HVAC EQUIPMENT INSTALLED UNDER THIS PROJECT. LIGHTNING PROTECTION COMPONENTS INCLUDE, BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO, EXISTING LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM EXPANSION, CONDUCTORS, AIR TERMINALS, GROUND PLATES, BONDING PLATES, AND FASTENERS, CONNECTORS, EXOTHERMIC WELDS, ETC. • RECONNECT EXISTING LIGHTNING PROTECTION GROUNDING CONDUCTORS AS REQUIRED FOR A FULLY FUNCTIONING LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM, THE LIGHTNING. PROTECTION SYSTEM EQUIPMENT SHALL BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH CORNELL UNIVERSITY WRITTEN STANDARDS, LIGHTNING PROTECTION COMPONENTS MUST CONFORM TO NFPA 780 AND UL 96. MATERIALS (ALUMINUM, COPPER, BRON2E, ETC) MUST MATCH EXISTING 01GHTING PROTECTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS (FIELD VERIFY PRIOR TO BID). FOLLOWING THE INSTALLATION OF LIGHTNING PROTECTION EQUIPMENT, THE LIGHTNING PROTECTION CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE A UL INSPECTION OF NEW COMPONENTS AND LETTER OF FINDINGS. COORDINATE EXACT REQUIREMENTS INSPECTION AND LETTER REQUIREMENTS WITH CORNELL UNIVERSITY. LOCAL CERTIFIED LIGHTNING PROTECTION CONTRACTOR 600 AUTHORIZED) IS MORSE-COLLINS INC. CONTACT INFORMATION IS AS FOLLOWS, MORSE-COLUNS, INC., 5047 STATE ROUTE 34, AUBURN, NEW YORK 13201, TELEPHONE NUMBER (315) 252-0543. EX. PLYWOOD BACKBOARD ELPLA EMCC-1 MCC -1 DA' FOR SF -1 FOR F-4 ori _i /Y / / I/ i i PENTHOUSE PLAN - ELECTRICA NORTH 11 I) ENGINEERING ONE WEBSTERS LANDING SYRACUSE, NEW YORK 13202 315;423.0185 0 10 4%, `V � /1 yy v' `�i...Tf tom. )1 � Wilt 7) a 8�ry4 llif SAW, CORNELL UNIVERSITY SNEE HALL PENTHOUSE CLEAN ROOM HEAT RECOVERY 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE ITHACA, NEW YORK 14853 1 05.26.17 REVISION MK DATE DESCRIPTION PROJECT NO. 13-7700A DATE 05/25/2017 DRAWN BY WFT CHECKED BY AD .5 DOCUMEN-I AND THE DtSION SOLUTIONS COMUMNEU WC. ENGINEERING AND MAY NOT BE NLVRODUCED NOR oocunt<rvrw,mWrvre,pr+wrs,rt[AZNPS77 G'"r"' SHEET TITLE PENTHOUSE & ROOF PLAN SHEET NUMBER -101 GENERAL NOTES: VERIFY ALL MOTOR SIZES BEFORE ORDERING ANY CONTROL DEVICES, B. DEVICES FURNISHED BY OTHERS SHALL BE INSTALLED d CIRCUITED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. C. VERIFY FEEDER SIZES FOR VOLTAGE DROP IN ACCORDANCE W TH NEC REQUIREMENTS BASED ON ACTUAL ROUTING DISTANCES IN FIELD. REFERENCE NOTES, 1. PROVIDING WRING AND RACEWAY FROM PANELBOARD/ CONTROL CENTER TO VFD, BETWEEN VFD AND DISCONNECT SWITCH,ANO FROM DISCONNECT SNATCH TO EQUIPMENT TERMINAL CONNECTION AS RECURED. 2. PROVIDE HACR TYPE CIRCUIT BREAKER. 3, DISCONNECT SWTCH FURNISHED WITH UNIT. ABBREVIATIONS: A = APMERAGE AU = AT UNIT C _ CONDUIT CB = CIRCUIT BREAKER CKT = CIRCUIT EC = ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR FS = FUSIBLE SWITCH HP = HORSEPOWER KW = KILOWATT MCA = MINIMUM CIRCUIT AMPS MC = MECHANICAL I HVAC CONTRACTOR NED = NON FUSED DISCONNECT P = POLE PC = PLUMBING CONTRACTOR TC = TEMPERATURE CONTROLS CONTRACTOR ENGINEERING ONE WEBSTERS LANDING SYRACUSE, NEW YORK 13202 315,423,0105 >- LL w 0 Nw LL 1- Lu 2 0 0z w J 0 w J U) Q 0 wz zw 15 In CO 71. -Y 00 CC E -w NZ 2 oQ =U NQ A 00.00.09 MK DATE DESCRIPTION PROJECT NO. DATE DRAWN BY CHECKED BY 13-7700A 04/18/2017 WFT AD 1PO ENG,NEERING AND NOT RE REPRODUCED NOR DISCLOSED IN WHOLE OR OA PART BY ANY pANT, RECEIVING 7M.5 UCCUXIENT VNTHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT SHEET TITLE SCHEDULES SHEET NUMBER ME -601 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT & CONTROL SCHEDULE EQUIPMENT SUPPLY CONTROLLER DEVICE TYPE REQUIRED S LOCATIONS ACCESSORIES (PROVIDED BY EC) REFERENCE NOTES (SEE BELOW) 0 o 0 F g 0 w /.4 P o PANEL OR CONTROL i, CENTER CIRCUIT NUMBER '.. CIRCUIT BREAKER OR FUSED SNATCH 2z Sys ¢ ' OKU LL v0 a z§ �5 o0.�� GROUND HARE (SIZED PER NEC) o — �. INSTALLED BY PACKAGED CONTROL UNIT 7 COMBINATION MAGNETIC STARTER MANUAL MOTOR STARTER WITH RELAY CONTROL DEVICE(S) INSTALLATION LOCATION ,� m' o 5 SUPPLY DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR RETURN DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR DISCONNECT SNATCH FIRE ALARM i �. LL ° ��h O> 4 HP KW MCA WIRE CONDUIT WIRE CONDUIT SF -1 SUPPLY FAN PENTHOUSE ROOF T.5 45013 HPLB 1021,23 200/3P CB 3412 3141 3412 314' 512 MC EC X EC EC EC X X AU X 1,2,3 GENERAL NOTES: VERIFY ALL MOTOR SIZES BEFORE ORDERING ANY CONTROL DEVICES, B. DEVICES FURNISHED BY OTHERS SHALL BE INSTALLED d CIRCUITED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. C. VERIFY FEEDER SIZES FOR VOLTAGE DROP IN ACCORDANCE W TH NEC REQUIREMENTS BASED ON ACTUAL ROUTING DISTANCES IN FIELD. REFERENCE NOTES, 1. PROVIDING WRING AND RACEWAY FROM PANELBOARD/ CONTROL CENTER TO VFD, BETWEEN VFD AND DISCONNECT SWITCH,ANO FROM DISCONNECT SNATCH TO EQUIPMENT TERMINAL CONNECTION AS RECURED. 2. PROVIDE HACR TYPE CIRCUIT BREAKER. 3, DISCONNECT SWTCH FURNISHED WITH UNIT. ABBREVIATIONS: A = APMERAGE AU = AT UNIT C _ CONDUIT CB = CIRCUIT BREAKER CKT = CIRCUIT EC = ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR FS = FUSIBLE SWITCH HP = HORSEPOWER KW = KILOWATT MCA = MINIMUM CIRCUIT AMPS MC = MECHANICAL I HVAC CONTRACTOR NED = NON FUSED DISCONNECT P = POLE PC = PLUMBING CONTRACTOR TC = TEMPERATURE CONTROLS CONTRACTOR ENGINEERING ONE WEBSTERS LANDING SYRACUSE, NEW YORK 13202 315,423,0105 >- LL w 0 Nw LL 1- Lu 2 0 0z w J 0 w J U) Q 0 wz zw 15 In CO 71. -Y 00 CC E -w NZ 2 oQ =U NQ A 00.00.09 MK DATE DESCRIPTION PROJECT NO. DATE DRAWN BY CHECKED BY 13-7700A 04/18/2017 WFT AD 1PO ENG,NEERING AND NOT RE REPRODUCED NOR DISCLOSED IN WHOLE OR OA PART BY ANY pANT, RECEIVING 7M.5 UCCUXIENT VNTHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT SHEET TITLE SCHEDULES SHEET NUMBER ME -601 Bulletin (BA) - 1 Project: Snee Clean Room Heat Recovery Process BA - 1 Document: Current Finish Workflow Step: Subject: Bulletin BA -1 Status: Received Reference Sheet: M-101 and E-101 Project Number: 10519 Overall Due Date: Step Due Date: Description: Clarification for building permit. Included column lines on the roof plans and detail for roof penetration and sib cutting Required Supporting Yes Documentation Attached: RFI Lookup: Attached Documents File Name 5.26.17_Bulletin #BA-1.pdf Attached By Date Attached Step Daniels, Al 06.01.2017 Start (IPD: Engineering) 7700A_E-101 PENTHOUSE PLAN.pdf Daniels, Al (IPD: Engineering) Start 7700A_M-101 PENTHOUSE & ROOF PLAN - revised.pdf Daniels, Al 06.01.2017 Start (IPD: Engineering) |PU:B4G|NEF0NG ONE WEBSTER'S LANDING SYRACUSE, NEW YORK 13202 BULLETIN NO. BA -1 May 26, 2017 SNEE HALL ENERGY RECOVERY PROJECT NO.: 13'7700A This Bulletin contains changes to the requirements of the Contract Documents and Specifications. Such changes are to be incorporated into the Construction Documents and shall apply to the work with the same meaning and force as if they had been included in the original document. Wherever this Bulletin modifies a portion of a paragraph of the specifications or a portion of any Drawing, the remainder of the Paragraph or Drawing shall remain in force. NOTE: Provisions ofall ContractDocuments apply. Item 1. Drawing M-101 — Penthouse & Roof HVAC Plan REFER to revised contracdrawing M-101 for addition ofcolurnn line on roofplan and roof opening details Item 2. Drawing E-101 — Penthouse & Roof Electrical Plan REFER to revised contract drawing E-103 for addition ofcolumn line 011 roofplan ****END OF BULLETIN"** PROJECT MANUAL CORNELL UNIVERSITY SNEE HALL, 4th FLOOR Clean Room Heat Recovery 112 HOLLISTER DRIVE ITHACA, NY 14853 OWNER: CORNELL UNIVERSITY Ithaca, NY 14853 M.E.P. ENGINEER:IPD: ENGINEERING One Webster's Landing Syracuse, NY 13202 JOB NUMBER: IPD#13-7700A DATE: April 18, 2017 SET NO. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 210553 - 1 SECTION 210553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pipe labels. 2. Stencils. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE LABELS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. ActionCraft Products, Inc.; a division of Industrial Test Equipment Co., Inc. 2. Brady Corporation. 3. Brimar Industries, Inc. 4. Carlton Industries, LP. 5. Champion America. 6. Craftmark. 7. emedco. 8. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co. 9. LEM Products Inc. 10. Marking Services Inc. 11. Seton Identification Products. B. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service and showing flow direction according to ASME A13.1. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 210553 - 2 C. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive. D. Self-adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing. E. Pipe-Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction. 1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping-system service lettering to accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction. 2. Lettering Size: Size letters according to ASME A13.1 for piping. F. Pipe-Label Colors: 1. Background Color: Safety Red. 2. Letter Color: White. 2.2 STENCILS A. Stencils for Piping: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Brimar Industries, Inc. b. Carlton Industries, LP. c. Champion America. d. Craftmark. e. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co. f. Marking Services Inc. 2. Lettering Size: Size letters according to ASME A13.1 for piping. 3. Stencil Material: Aluminum. 4. Stencil Paint: Safety Red, exterior, gloss, alkyd enamel. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form. 5. Identification Paint: White, exterior, alkyd enamel. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants, as well as dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and other substances that could impair bond of identification devices. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 210553 - 3 3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be installed. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors. C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. 3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION A. Piping: Painting of piping is specified in Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings." B. Stenciled Pipe-Label Option: Stenciled labels may be provided instead of manufactured pipe labels, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe labels, complying with ASME A13.1, with painted, color-coded bands or rectangles on each piping system. 1. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background. 2. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking. C. Pipe-Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows: 1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection excluding short takeoffs. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations and on both sides of through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit a view of concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels. D. Directional Flow Arrows: Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow in pipes including pipes where flow is allowed in both directions. END OF SECTION 210553 Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313 - 1 SECTION 211313 - WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pipes, fittings, and specialties. 2. Sprinklers. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Standard-Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Wet-pipe sprinkler system piping designed to operate at working pressure of 175 psig maximum. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS A. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing water and that is connected to water supply through alarm valve. Water discharges immediately from sprinklers when they are opened. Sprinklers open when heat melts fusible link or destroys frangible device. Hose connections are included if indicated. 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Standard-Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 175-psig minimum working pressure. B. Delegated Design: Design sprinkler system(s), including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. All equipment, material and components shall be FM Global Approved. 1. Available fire-hydrant flow test should be based on a water test completed within one year of planned installation day. C. Sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: 10 percent, including losses through water-service piping, valves, and backflow preventers. 2. Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design: Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313 - 2 a. Provide hydraulically designed system, minimum density of 0.2 GPM/SF over the hydraulically most remote 3000 SF, plus a 250 GPM allowance for hose streams, for 60 minute supply duration. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For sprinkler systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. Sprinkler drawings, hydraulic calculations, and manufacturer’s cut sheets shall be submitted to FM Global and the Ithaca Fire Department for review and comment prior to purchase or fabrication of materials. D. Coordination Drawings: Sprinkler systems, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Items penetrating finished ceiling include the following: a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. E. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and professional engineer. F. Welding certificates. G. Fire-hydrant flow test report. H. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13. Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping." I. Field quality-control reports. J. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sprinkler specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing sprinkler systems and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313 - 3 a. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field test reports by a qualified professional engineer. B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. D. Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing shall comply with the following: 1. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems." 2. FM Global property loss prevention data sheet 2-0, installation guidelines for automatic sprinklers. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Interruption of Existing Sprinkler Service: Do not interrupt sprinkler service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary sprinkler service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of sprinkler service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of sprinkler service without Owner's written permission. 3. Electrician to provide temporary heat detectors prior to the removal of existing sprinkler. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies. 1.10 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Design shall comply with the requirements of the latest recognized edition of the following codes and standards: 1. All applicable New York State Codes. 2. Factory Mutual Global (FM). Please refer to FM’s Data Sheets at www.fmglobal.com for additional information. 3. All applicable NFPA Standards. 4. ANSI A-17.1, Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators. 5. New York State Health Department, Cross Connection Control Manual. B. In the event of an overlap or conflict between the requirements of the codes (NFPA & FM), laws and ordinances, and this standard, then negotiations involving FM, the AHJ and EH&S shall bring resolution to the dispute. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313 - 4 C. As part of the Contract Document production, the Engineer shall incorporate the following language into the drawing general notes or specifications: “Contractor shall provide copies of Shop Drawings and Hydraulic Calculations to the following for approval: 1. Ithaca Fire Department 2. Cornell Environmental Health & Safety 3. FM Global Contractor shall not commence with construction until all parties listed above have given their approval.” 1.11 DEFINITIONS A. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ): shall be defined at the inception of the project and has the potential to vary in conjunction with project location. Consult with Cornell University Facilities Engineering to obtain appropriate AHJ. B. EH&S – Cornell University Environmental Health and Safety Fire Protection Section. EH&S provides acceptance and inspection of all fire protection and suppression systems. C. Contractor – When referenced within Section 15300, “contractor” shall mean the firm responsible for preparation of hydraulic calculations and shop drawings, and for installation of fire protection systems. D. Project Engineer – The Engineer of record who represents the Design/Engineering firm. The Engineer shall seal with a Professional Engineer (PE) stamp all record contract drawings prior to distribution. E. Owner – Cornell University and/or appointed representative shall be considered the Project Manager or Construction Manager as assigned. F. FM – Factory Mutual G. UL – Underwriters Laboratories 1.12 GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS: A. General Design Requirements: 1. All fire protection systems shall be hydraulically calculated and designed by a qualified designer or fire protection engineer. 2. Design densities and demand areas shall be determined by either NFPA or FM requirements, whichever is most stringent. 3. FM Global DOES NOT recognize NFPA’s reduced demand area rules, and as such, they are not allowed for use in designing sprinkler systems on campus. 4. Flushing valves shall be provided on the mains, cross-mains, branch lines and run outs of new sprinklers systems (wet and dry), to facilitate post-construction cleaning and flushing Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313 - 5 of the system. Valves shall be sized per NFPA 25, in order to obtain the NFPA required minimum velocity of 10ft/s for any given pipe size. On piping 2” and smaller, line size ball valves can be applied. In mains larger than 2”, typically there is a need for multiple 2” ball valves (especially on 4” and larger mains) to achieve the required flow. The engineer shall use hydraulic calculations to determine the number of 2” valves required on mains larger than 2”. 1.13 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounted, steel cabinet with hinged cover, and with space for minimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench. Include number of sprinklers required by NFPA 13 and sprinkler wrench. Include separate cabinet with sprinklers and wrench for each type of sprinkler used on Project. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, and fitting materials, and for joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes. B. All equipment shall be UL listed for Fire Protection Service. C. Schedule 10 or thin wall piping is not allowed. 2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Standard Weight, schedule 40, Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E. Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method. B. Black-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard-weight, seamless steel pipe with threaded ends. C. Malleable- or Ductile-Iron Unions: UL 860. D. Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME 16.1, Class 125. E. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 150. F. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M and ASME B16.9. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313 - 6 2.3 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick. 1. Class 125, Cast-Iron Flanges and Class 150, Bronze Flat-Face Flanges: Full-face gaskets. 2. Class 250, Cast-Iron Flanges and Class 300, Steel Raised-Face Flanges: Ring-type gaskets. B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated. C. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. 2.4 SPRINKLERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. 2. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. 3. Viking Corporation. B. General Requirements: 1. All sprinklers shall be FM Globe approved. Quick response, standard coverage, pendent- type sprinkler heads with temperature rating of 135-170°F. Extend coverage sprinkler head not permitted. 2. Pressure Rating for Residential Sprinklers: 175 psig maximum. 3. Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175 psig minimum. C. Automatic Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element: 1. Early-Suppression, Fast-Response Applications: UL 1767. 2. Nonresidential Applications: UL 199. 3. Characteristics: Nominal 1/2-inch orifice with Discharge Coefficient K of 5.6, and for "Ordinary" temperature classification rating unless otherwise indicated or required by application. D. Sprinkler Finishes: 1. Chrome plated. E. Special Coatings: 1. Wax. 2. Lead. 3. Corrosion-resistant paint. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313 - 7 F. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers are specified with sprinklers. G. Sprinkler Guards: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. b. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. c. Victaulic Company. d. Viking Corporation. 2. Standard: UL 199. 3. Type: Wire cage with fastening device for attaching to sprinkler. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13, NFPA 291, and FM Global Standard. Use results for system design calculations required in "Quality Assurance" Article. B. Report test results promptly and in writing. C. System test shall be witnessed by EH&S and IFD. Scheduling shall be done through Dan Phillips (EH&S). 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical. 1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating from approved working plans. B. Piping Standard: Comply with requirements for installation of sprinkler piping in NFPA 13. C. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes. D. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller. E. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313 - 8 F. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage. G. Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13and FM Global. Comply with requirements for hanger materials in NFPA 13 and FM Global. H. Fill sprinkler system piping with water. I. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 210517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Fire- Suppression Piping." J. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 210518 "Escutcheons for Fire-Suppression Piping." 3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating for aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated. B. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller. C. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections. D. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. E. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly. F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9. G. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. H. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article. 1. Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated. Do not use welded joints for galvanized-steel pipe. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313 - 9 I. Steel-Piping, Cut-Grooved Joints: Cut square-edge groove in end of pipe according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe joints. J. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems. 3.4 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION A. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of narrow dimension of acoustical ceiling panels. B. Install sprinklers into flexible, sprinkler hose fittings and install hose into bracket on ceiling grid. 3.5 IDENTIFICATION A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in NFPA 13. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 3. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance" Chapter. 4. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices. 5. Coordinate with fire-alarm tests. Operate as required. 6. Coordinate with fire-pump tests. Operate as required. 7. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire-department equipment. 8. All hydro testing to be witnessed by EH&S and IFD. Scheduling of test to be done by Dan Phillips (EH&S). 9. Flushing valves shall be provided on the mains, cross-mains, branch lines, and run outs of new sprinkler system, to facilitate post-construction cleaning and flushing of system. Valves shall be sized per NFPA 25, in order to obtain the NFPA required minimum velocity of 10 ft/s for any given pipe size. C. Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313 - 10 3.7 CLEANING A. All testing shall be in accordance with specified procedures in the listed codes and standards. B. The authority having jurisdiction requires that a representative witness the sprinkler and standpipe hydrostatic testing of new installations that are within their jurisdiction. Advance notice and scheduling is required through EH&S. C. Prior to flushing and cleaning the contractor shall contact Jim Evanitsky from Cornell University to witness and test cleaning solution. All fire protection systems shall be thoroughly cleaned and flushed with tri-sodium phosphate or a cleaning agent approved by Facilities Engineering prior to final acceptance. Once the system is filled by the Contractor, a sample will be taken to verify the concentration of the cleaning agent within the system. D. The Engineer shall include the following language in the contract document specifications: 1. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers. 2. Remove and replace all sprinklers having any paint on them that is other than the factory finish. 3. PIP System Cleaning: a. Piping with Microbiological Influenced Corrosion (MIC) coatings can be cleaned per the following procedure since MIC has not been found in sprinkler systems on this campus. b. Prior to introducing cleaning chemicals into sprinkler system, protect public water system from sprinkler system with a temporary RPZ (if the system is not already protected by an RPZ). c. Clean all pipe lines or sections of lines and connected equipment in new or modified systems and/or flush free of all pipe line debris loosened or introduced as a result of this Contract. This shall include removing all debris that has settled or collected at low points, in equipment, etc. Test equipment used for piping tests may be used to circulate cleaning liquids. d. Clean and disinfect sprinkler distribution piping as follows: 1) Purge new and reused distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired before use. 2) Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at points of outlet. 3) Fill systems with water/tri-sodium phosphate (TSP) solution containing at least 1 gallon TSP liquid per 1000 gallon of system volume, isolate and allow to stand for 24 hours. 4) Drain system of previous solution to sanitary sewer. 5) Flush system with clean, potable water until no TSP remains in water coming from system. 6) Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedure if biological examination shows evidence of contamination. 7) Prepare reports of purging and disinfecting activities. E. Each system will have a corrosion coupon and test port rack (1” stub with valve and cap) installed at the alarm valve. The corrosion coupons shall be obtained from the FM Pipe Shop Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313 - 11 Water Treatment Lab so the water quality and corrosion data can be properly recorded and monitored by Cornell over time as part of ongoing routine maintenance. F. New sprinkler systems shall not be treated for MIC upon completion of final system cleaning. G. In existing systems that are currently chemically treated for MIC: after modifications or additions to existing systems have been applied, make-up water for said systems needs to also be chemically treated. Information on the types of chemicals and specific concentrations shall be obtained from the FM Pipe Shop Water Treatment Lab by the Contractor. 3.8 PIPING SCHEDULE A. Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be one of the following: 1. Schedule 40, black-steel pipe with cut grooved-end fittings for steel piping; and grooved joints. 2. Schedule 40, welding fittings; and welded joints. B. Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4, shall be the following: 1. Schedule 40, black-steel pipe with cut, uncoated, grooved-end fittings for steel piping; and grooved joints. 3.9 SPRINKLER SCHEDULE A. Use sprinkler types in subparagraphs below for the following applications: 1. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers. 2. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Pendent, recessed, sprinklers as indicated. B. Provide sprinkler types in subparagraphs below with finishes indicated. 1. Concealed Sprinklers: Rough brass, with factory-painted white cover plate. 2. Recessed Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with bright chrome escutcheon. 3. Pendent Sprinklers: Chrome plated in finished spaces exposed to view; rough bronze in unfinished spaces not exposed to view; wax coated where exposed to acids, chemicals, or other corrosive fumes. END OF SECTION 211313 Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513 - 1 SECTION 230513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following: 1. Motor controllers. 2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. 3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. 4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated. B. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors. C. Efficiency: Premium Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1. 2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet (1000 m) above sea level. B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513 - 2 2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor. B. Efficiency: Premium Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1. C. Service Factor: 1.15. D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque. 1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding. 2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed. E. Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed. F. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage. G. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading. H. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating. I. Insulation: Class F. J. Code Letter Designation: 1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G. 2. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic. K. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame sizes smaller than 324T. 2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer. 1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by pulse-width modulated inverters. 2. Energy- and Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation. 3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation. 4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected motors. 5. AEGIS Bearing Protection Rings. B. Severe-Duty Motors: Comply with IEEE 841, with 1.15 minimum service factor. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513 - 3 C. Manufacturers 1. Bacdor 2. Marathon 3. GE 2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application: 1. Permanent-split capacitor. 2. Split phase. 3. Capacitor start, inductor run. 4. Capacitor start, capacitor run. B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type. C. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading. D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type. E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 230513 Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 - 1 SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Equipment labels. 2. Warning signs and labels. 3. Pipe labels. 4. Valve tags. 5. Warning tags. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device. C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label. D. Valve numbering scheme. E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors. C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS A. Plastic Labels for Equipment: 1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. 2. Letter Color: White. 3. Background Color: Black. 4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F (71 deg C). 5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm). 6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. 7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (A4) bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data. 2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. B. Letter Color: White. C. Background Color: Red. D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F (71 deg C). E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm). F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two- thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 - 3 G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification instructions. 2.3 PIPE LABELS A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction. B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive. C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing. D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction. 1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction. 2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm)high. 2.4 VALVE TAGS A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch (13-mm) numbers. 1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware. 2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook. B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (A4) bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses. 1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 - 4 3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment. B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible. 3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION A. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows: 1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet (7.6 m) in areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels. 3.4 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering hose connections; and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule. END OF SECTION 230553 Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 1 SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Balancing Air Systems: a. Constant-volume air systems. 2. Balancing Hydronic Piping Systems: a. Variable-flow hydronic systems. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau. B. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation that the TAB contractor and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3. C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article. D. Certified TAB reports. E. Sample report forms. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 2 F. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following: 1. Instrument type and make. 2. Serial number. 3. Application. 4. Dates of use. 5. Dates of calibration. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by NEBB. 1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by NEBB. 2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certified by NEBB as a TAB technician. B. TAB Conference: Meet with Architect and Owner on approval of the TAB strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Require the participation of the TAB field supervisor and technicians. Provide seven days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location. 1. Agenda Items: a. The Contract Documents examination report. b. The TAB plan. c. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors. d. Coordination of documentation and communication flow. C. Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following: 1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports. 2. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification. D. TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by Owner. E. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111, Section 5, "Instrumentation." F. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing." G. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing." Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 3 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations. B. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times. B. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment. B. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are accessible. C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment. D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls. E. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. 1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. 2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design." Compare results with the design data and installed conditions. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 4 F. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed. G. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections. H. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation. I. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning. J. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens are replaced by permanent screens with indicated perforations. K. Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or mixing fluid flows. L. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins. M. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping. N. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment. O. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures. B. Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following: 1. Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete. 2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air. 3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. 4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. 5. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open. 6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational. 7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and access to balancing devices is provided. 8. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be met. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 5 3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" and in this Section. 1. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing." B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures. 1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness as used to construct ducts. 2. After testing and balancing, install test ports and duct access doors that comply with requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories." 3. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation, coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Section 230713 "Duct Insulation," Section 230716 "HVAC Equipment Insulation," and Section 230719 "HVAC Piping Insulation." C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings. D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units. 3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes. B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts. C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity. D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements. E. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers. F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters. G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection. H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path. I. Check for airflow blockages. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 6 J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning. K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components. L. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts." 3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer. 1. Measure total airflow. a. Where sufficient space in ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow. 2. Measure fan static pressures as follows to determine actual static pressure: a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions. b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as possible, upstream from the flexible connection, and downstream from duct restrictions. d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan. 3. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit, rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment. a. Report the cleanliness status of filters and the time static pressures are measured. 4. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices, such as sound traps, heat- recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions. 5. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors. Recommend adjustments to accommodate actual conditions. 6. Obtain approval from Owner for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated speed. Comply with requirements in HVAC Sections for air-handling units for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air-handling-unit performance. 7. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full-cooling, full- heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required brake horsepower. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 7 B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances. 1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts. a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone. 2. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper, and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved. 3. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances. C. Measure air outlets and inlets without making adjustments. 1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors. D. Adjust air outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using branch volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at air terminals. 1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents. 2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts. 3.6 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS A. Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is more than the indicated airflow of the fan, place a selected number of terminal units at a minimum set-point airflow with the remainder at maximum-airflow condition until the total airflow of the terminal units equals the indicated airflow of the fan. Select the reduced-airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts. B. Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems: After the fan systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows: 1. Set outdoor-air dampers at minimum, and set return- and exhaust-air dampers at a position that simulates full-cooling load. 2. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow and static pressure. Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering static pressure for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of the terminal-unit manufacturer's recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome terminal-unit discharge system losses. 3. Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within indicated airflow. 4. Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed maximum airflow. Use terminal-unit manufacturer's written instructions to Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 8 make this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units the same as described for constant-volume air systems. 5. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow the same as described for constant-volume air systems. a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave outlets balanced for maximum airflow. 6. Remeasure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outdoor airflow. a. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described for constant-volume air systems. 7. Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static-pressure controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure that adequate static pressure is maintained at the most critical unit. 8. Record final fan-performance data. 3.7 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data, and number in sequence starting at pump to end of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against the approved pump flow rate. Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent. B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts. C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the general preparation procedures specified above: 1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow. 2. Check liquid level in expansion tank. 3. Check makeup water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent. 4. Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation, and set at indicated flow. 5. Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type unless several terminal valves are kept open. 6. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers. 7. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so motor nameplate rating is not exceeded. 8. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated. 3.8 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Measure water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures except for positive-displacement pumps: Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 9 1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Read pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heights. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size. a. If impeller sizes must be adjusted to achieve pump performance, obtain approval from Owner and comply with requirements in Section 232123 "Hydronic Pumps." 2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the pump and mark pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve until indicated water flow is achieved. a. Monitor motor performance during procedures and do not operate motors in overload conditions. 3. Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the system based on pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage. 4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 10 percent of design. B. Measure flow at all automatic flow control valves to verify that valves are functioning as designed. C. Measure flow at all pressure-independent characterized control valves, with valves in fully open position, to verify that valves are functioning as designed. D. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings. E. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance. 1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressure-drop relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device. F. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is 5 percent greater than indicated flow. G. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows: 1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated flow. 2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over indicated flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over indicated flow. 3. Record settings and mark balancing devices. H. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures including outdoor-air temperature. I. Measure the differential-pressure-control-valve settings existing at the conclusion of balancing. J. Check settings and operation of each safety valve. Record settings. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 10 3.9 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Balance systems with automatic two- and three-way control valves by setting systems at maximum flow through heat-exchange terminals and proceed as specified above for hydronic systems. 3.10 PROCEDURES FOR STEAM SYSTEMS A. Measure and record upstream and downstream pressure of each piece of equipment. B. Measure and record upstream and downstream steam pressure of pressure-reducing valves. C. Check settings and operation of automatic temperature-control valves, self-contained control valves, and pressure-reducing valves. Record final settings. D. Check settings and operation of each safety valve. Record settings. E. Verify the operation of each steam trap. 3.11 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data: 1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number. 2. Motor horsepower rating. 3. Motor rpm. 4. Efficiency rating. 5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase. 6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase. 7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating. B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass of the controller to prove proper operation. Record observations including name of controller manufacturer, model number, serial number, and nameplate data. 3.12 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS A. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each water coil: 1. Entering- and leaving-water temperature. 2. Water flow rate. 3. Water pressure drop. 4. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 5. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cooling coils. 6. Airflow. 7. Air pressure drop. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 11 B. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each electric heating coil: 1. Nameplate data. 2. Airflow. 3. Entering- and leaving-air temperature at full load. 4. Voltage and amperage input of each phase at full load and at each incremental stage. 5. Calculated kilowatt at full load. 6. Fuse or circuit-breaker rating for overload protection. C. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each steam coil: 1. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 2. Airflow. 3. Air pressure drop. 4. Inlet steam pressure. D. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each refrigerant coil: 1. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 2. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 3. Airflow. 4. Air pressure drop. 5. Refrigerant suction pressure and temperature. 3.13 PROCEDURES FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING EXISTING SYSTEMS A. Perform a preconstruction inspection of existing equipment that is to remain and be reused. 1. Measure and record the operating speed, airflow, and static pressure of each fan. 2. Measure motor voltage and amperage. Compare the values to motor nameplate information. 3. Check the refrigerant charge. 4. Check the condition of filters. 5. Check the condition of coils. 6. Check the operation of the drain pan and condensate-drain trap. 7. Check bearings and other lubricated parts for proper lubrication. 8. Report on the operating condition of the equipment and the results of the measurements taken. Report deficiencies. B. Before performing testing and balancing of existing systems, inspect existing equipment that is to remain and be reused to verify that existing equipment has been cleaned and refurbished. Verify the following: 1. New filters are installed. 2. Coils are clean and fins combed. 3. Drain pans are clean. 4. Fans are clean. 5. Bearings and other parts are properly lubricated. 6. Deficiencies noted in the preconstruction report are corrected. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 12 C. Perform testing and balancing of existing systems to the extent that existing systems are affected by the renovation work. 1. Compare the indicated airflow of the renovated work to the measured fan airflows, and determine the new fan speed and the face velocity of filters and coils. 2. Verify that the indicated airflows of the renovated work result in filter and coil face velocities and fan speeds that are within the acceptable limits defined by equipment manufacturer. 3. If calculations increase or decrease the air flow rates and water flow rates by more than 5 percent, make equipment adjustments to achieve the calculated rates. If increase or decrease is 5 percent or less, equipment adjustments are not required. 4. Balance each air outlet. 3.14 TOLERANCES A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances: 1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent. 3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent. 4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent. 3.15 REPORTING A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices. 3.16 FINAL REPORT A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems. 1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer. 2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration. B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following: 1. Pump curves. 2. Fan curves. 3. Manufacturers' test data. 4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 5. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and product data. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 13 C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data: 1. Title page. 2. Name and address of the TAB contractor. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Architect's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report. 10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. Number each page in the report. 11. Summary of contents including the following: a. Indicated versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents. 12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings. 14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values. 15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following: a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils. e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems. g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller. h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance. D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following: 1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows. 2. Water and steam flow rates. 3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. 4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations. 5. Terminal units. 6. Balancing stations. 7. Position of balancing devices. E. Air-Handling-Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following: 1. Unit Data: a. Unit identification. b. Location. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 14 c. Make and type. d. Model number and unit size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Unit arrangement and class. g. Discharge arrangement. h. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore. i. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm). j. Number, make, and size of belts. k. Number, type, and size of filters. 2. Motor Data: a. Motor make, and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full-load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore. f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm). 3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Total air flow rate in cfm (L/s). b. Total system static pressure in inches wg (Pa). c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg (Pa). e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa). f. Preheat-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa). g. Cooling-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa). h. Heating-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa). i. Outdoor airflow in cfm (L/s). j. Return airflow in cfm (L/s). k. Outdoor-air damper position. l. Return-air damper position. m. Vortex damper position. F. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following: 1. Fan Data: a. System identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Arrangement and class. g. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore. h. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm). 2. Motor Data: a. Motor make, and frame type and size. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 15 b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full-load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore. f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm). g. Number, make, and size of belts. 3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Total airflow rate in cfm (L/s). b. Total system static pressure in inches wg (Pa). c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg (Pa). e. Suction static pressure in inches wg (Pa). G. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the duct cross-section and record the following: 1. Report Data: a. System and air-handling-unit number. b. Location and zone. c. Traverse air temperature in deg F (deg C). d. Duct static pressure in inches wg (Pa). e. Duct size in inches (mm). f. Duct area in sq. ft. (sq. m). g. Indicated air flow rate in cfm (L/s). h. Indicated velocity in fpm (m/s). i. Actual air flow rate in cfm (L/s). j. Actual average velocity in fpm (m/s). k. Barometric pressure in psig (Pa). H. Air-Terminal-Device Reports: 1. Unit Data: a. System and air-handling unit identification. b. Location and zone. c. Apparatus used for test. d. Area served. e. Make. f. Number from system diagram. g. Type and model number. h. Size. i. Effective area in sq. ft. (sq. m). 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Air flow rate in cfm (L/s). b. Air velocity in fpm (m/s). c. Preliminary air flow rate as needed in cfm (L/s). Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 16 d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm (m/s). e. Final air flow rate in cfm (L/s). f. Final velocity in fpm (m/s). g. Space temperature in deg F (deg C). I. System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the following: 1. Unit Data: a. System and air-handling-unit identification. b. Location and zone. c. Room or riser served. d. Coil make and size. e. Flowmeter type. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Air flow rate in cfm (L/s). b. Entering-water temperature in deg F (deg C). c. Leaving-water temperature in deg F (deg C). d. Water pressure drop in feet of head or psig (kPa). e. Entering-air temperature in deg F (deg C). f. Leaving-air temperature in deg F (deg C). J. Pump Test Reports: Calculate impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves and include the following: 1. Unit Data: a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Service. d. Make and size. e. Model number and serial number. f. Water flow rate in gpm (L/s). g. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig (kPa). h. Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig (kPa). i. Pump rpm. j. Impeller diameter in inches (mm). k. Motor make and frame size. l. Motor horsepower and rpm. m. Voltage at each connection. n. Amperage for each phase. o. Full-load amperage and service factor. p. Seal type. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Static head in feet of head or psig (kPa). b. Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). c. Actual impeller size in inches (mm). Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 17 d. Full-open flow rate in gpm (L/s). e. Full-open pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). f. Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). g. Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). h. Final total pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). i. Final water flow rate in gpm (L/s). j. Voltage at each connection. k. Amperage for each phase. 3.17 INSPECTIONS A. Initial Inspection: 1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balance readings documented in the final report. B. Final Inspection: 1. After initial inspection is complete and documentation by random checks verifies that testing and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, request that a final inspection be made by Architect and Owner. 2. The TAB contractor's test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of Architect Owner. 3. Architect and Owner shall randomly select measurements, documented in the final report, to be rechecked. Rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements recorded or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour business day. 4. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as "FAILED." 5. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be considered incomplete and shall be rejected. C. TAB Work will be considered defective if it does not pass final inspections. If TAB Work fails, proceed as follows: 1. Recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and request a second final inspection. 2. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contract the services of another TAB contractor to complete TAB Work according to the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the original TAB contractor's final payment. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 18 3.18 ADDITIONAL TESTS A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions. B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions. END OF SECTION 230593 Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 1 SECTION 230713 - DUCT INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes insulating the following duct services: 1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air. 2. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air. 3. Indoor, exposed return located in unconditioned space. 4. Indoor, exposed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 230719 "HVAC Piping Insulation." 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied if any). 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training. B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less. 2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 2 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." B. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for duct insulation application. Before preparing ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance. C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing. 1.7 SCHEDULING A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results. B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in "Duct Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule," and "Aboveground, Outdoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied. B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871. D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795. E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process. F. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory-applied FSK Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 3 jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. Nominal density is 0.75 lb/cu. ft. or more. Thermal performance is an R-value of 5 or greater. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Johns Manville; Microlite. b. Knauf Insulation; Friendly Feel Duct Wrap. G. Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide insulation with factory-applied ASJ. Nominal density is 3.0 lb/cu. ft. or more. Thermal performance is an R-value of 5 or greater. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Johns Manville; 800 Series Spin-Glas. b. Knauf Insulation; Insulation Board. H. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Semirigid board material with factory-applied ASJ complying with ASTM C 1393, Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m) or more. Thermal conductivity (k-value) at 100 deg F (55 deg C) is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F (0.042 W/m x K) or less. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Johns Manville; MicroFlex. b. Knauf Insulation; Pipe and Tank Insulation. 2.2 ADHESIVES A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated. B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A. 1. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." C. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints. 1. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 4 2. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." D. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket. 1. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 2.3 MASTICS A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II. 1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services. 1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm (0.009 metric perm) at 43-mil (1.09-mm) dry film thickness. 2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F (Minus 29 to plus 82 deg C). 3. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight. 4. Color: White. C. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services. 1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm (0.03 metric perm) at 35-mil (0.9- mm) dry film thickness. 2. Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F (Minus 18 to plus 82 deg C). 3. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 44 percent by volume and 62 percent by weight. 4. Color: White. 2.4 SEALANTS A. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 121 deg C). 4. Color: Aluminum. 5. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 6. Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 5 B. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 121 deg C). 4. Color: White. 5. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 6. Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 2.5 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: 1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. 2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. 3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II. 2.6 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated. B. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. 1. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer. 2. Color: White. 2.7 TAPES A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136. 1. Width: 3 inches (75 mm). 2. Thickness: 11.5 mils (0.29 mm). 3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch (1.0 N/mm) in width. 4. Elongation: 2 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch (7.2 N/mm) in width. 6. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 6 B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136. 1. Width: 3 inches (75 mm). 2. Thickness: 6.5 mils (0.16 mm). 3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch (1.0 N/mm) in width. 4. Elongation: 2 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch (7.2 N/mm) in width. 6. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape. C. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive; suitable for indoor and outdoor applications. 1. Width: 2 inches (50 mm). 2. Thickness: 6 mils (0.15 mm). 3. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch (0.7 N/mm) in width. 4. Elongation: 500 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch (3.3 N/mm) in width. D. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive. 1. Width: 2 inches (50 mm). 2. Thickness: 3.7 mils (0.093 mm). 3. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch (1.1 N/mm) in width. 4. Elongation: 5 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch (6.2 N/mm) in width. 2.8 SECUREMENTS A. Bands: 1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304; 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) thick, 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide with wing seal or closed seal. 2. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to accept metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application. B. Insulation Pins and Hangers: 1. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- (2.6-mm-) diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) galvanized carbon- steel washer. 2. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- (0.41-mm-) thick, stainless-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in diameter. a. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 7 3. Nonmetal Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- (0.41-mm-) thick nylon sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in diameter. C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) wide, stainless steel or Monel. D. Wire: 0.080-inch (2.0-mm) nickel-copper alloy. 2.9 CORNER ANGLES A. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch (25 by 25 mm), aluminum according to ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application. 1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. 3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings. B. Install insulation materials, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of duct system as specified in insulation system schedules. C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 8 F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. G. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. H. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. I. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic. 1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic. 3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. J. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses. K. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows: 1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches (100 mm) o.c. 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches (50 mm) o.c. a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples. 4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal. 5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings. L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness. M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches (100 mm) beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 9 3.4 PENETRATIONS A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches (50 mm) below top of roof flashing. 4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches (50 mm). 4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. D. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches (50 mm). 1. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping"irestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers. E. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations: 1. Duct: For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches (50 mm). 2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping." 3.5 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 10 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor- discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches (450 mm) and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches (450 mm), place pins 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. each way, and 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers. f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches (50 mm) from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch (13-mm) outward- clinching staples, 1 inch (25 mm) o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field- applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor- barrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F (10 deg C) at 18-foot (5.5-m) intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches (75 mm). 5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) on longitudinal seams and end joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches (450 mm) o.c. 6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch- (150-mm-) wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches (150 mm) o.c. B. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 11 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor- discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches (450 mm) and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches (450 mm), space pins 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. each way, and 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches (50 mm) from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch (13-mm) outward- clinching staples, 1 inch (25 mm) o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field- applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor- barrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F (10 deg C) at 18-foot (5.5-m) intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches (75 mm). 5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch- (150-mm-) wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches (150 mm) o.c. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 DUCT INSULATION 230713 - 12 3.6 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION A. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch (25-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge. B. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless- steel bands 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. and at end joints. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Perform tests and inspections. C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location(s) for each duct system defined in the "Duct Insulation Schedule, General" Article. D. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements. 3.8 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. B. Refer to insulation schedule on drawings for application and thickness. END OF SECTION 230713 Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-1 SECTION 230900 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including control components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory-wired controls. B. See Division 23 Section "Building Automation and Control System Communications and Interoperability" for additional requirements that relate to this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each control device, panel, controller, and accessory indicated; including dimensions, capacities, performance and electrical characteristics, and material finishes. Also, include installation, start-up, calibration, and maintenance instructions as well as cabling and tubing requirements. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Schematic Flow Diagrams: Include point names, point addresses, point type, normal position of output devices, device ranges, setpoints, bill of materials listing all devices and manufacturer numbers, and legend of device symbols. 2. Damper schedule: Include system served, size, design maximum flow, pressure drop at design maximum flow, manufacturer, model number, fail position, type, size and actuator information. 3. Valve schedule: Include equipment served, valve size, CV, design maximum flow, pressure drop at design maximum flow, position of valve at design condition, manufacturer, model number, close-off rating, normal position, valve characteristic, valve turndown, actuator information, and design controlled circuit pressure differential range. 4. Control System Architecture Diagram: One-line system architecture diagram indicating schematic location of all hardware, controllers, workstations, wiring diagrams, LAN interface devices, gateways, etc. Indicate address and type for each control unit. Indicate physical media, protocol, communication speed, and type of each LAN. 5. Control Sequences of Operation: Include sequences for each independent system, for all modes of operation (on, off, occupied, unoccupied, warm-up, cool-down, summer, winter, economizer, etc.); detailed steps during mode switches; details of operation during and after a power outage; specific direction on failure scenarios for loss of proof and all safety device trips; setpoints, trip points and ranges; smoke control systems; fire alarm panel interlocks and special operating modes. All related equipment should be grouped together by areas served; in addition to grouping sequences into function sections (start/stop, static pressure control, differential pressure control, heating, cooling, economizer, etc.). 6. Points List: In tabular form. Include all physical and virtual points and organize by system/sub-system. Include names, descriptors, addresses, and point types with applicable range as a minimum. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-2 7. Alarms and Alarms List: Include the alarm point name, point type, and alarm parameters. 8. Floor Plans: Include locations of all controllers/control panels, sensors, operator workstations, interface devices, UPS’s, network components, etc. 9. Wiring Diagrams: Include both ladder logic type diagrams for motor starter, control, and safety circuits and detailed digital interface panel point termination diagrams with all wire numbers and terminal block number identified. Provide panel termination drawings on separate drawings. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory- installed and portions to be field-installed. All wiring of related components that make up a system shall be grouped together in one diagram. 10. Sample Graphics and Trends: Sample of web-based graphics and trends for the use of interfacing to the BACS. C. Field quality-control test reports. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include maintenance instructions and spare parts list for each type of control device, control unit and accessory; BACS user’s guides for each controller type and for all workstation hardware, software, and workstation peripheral; BACS programming manuals for each controller type and for all workstation software. E. As-Built Documents: 1. Hard Copy (General): All drawings and documentation required at the submittal phase, reflecting the final installed condition of the BACS. 2. Hard Copy (Control Panels): All the drawings and documentation associated with that panel and its field devices shall be provided in a plastic protective pocket mounted inside the panel door. 3. Electronic Copy: As submittal and as-built documents shall be provided. Documentation shall be provided in either Microsoft Office format (Work, Excel, etc.) or Adobe Portable Document format (PDF). 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. Substitutions are not allowed. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-3 2.2 CONTROL SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: 1. Alerton Inc. 2. Automated Logic Corporation. B. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface equipment, other apparatus, and accessories to control mechanical systems. C. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface equipment, other apparatus, accessories, and software connected to distributed controllers operating in multiuser, multitasking environment on token-passing network and programmed to control mechanical systems. An operator workstation permits interface with the network via dynamic color graphics with each mechanical system, building floor plan, and control device depicted by point-and-click graphics. 2.3 DDC EQUIPMENT A. Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with programmable, nonvolatile, random- access memory; local operator access and display panel; integral interface equipment; and backup power source. 1. Units monitor or control each I/O point; process information; execute commands from other control units, devices, and operator stations; and download from or upload to operator workstation. 2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status, with no communication to other devices on the network while performing their monitoring and control routines using programs and operating parameters stored in the controllers’ memory. Functions include the following: a. Global communications. b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O. c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points. d. DDC software applications, alarm processing and buffering software, energy management software. e. Testing and developing control algorithms without disrupting field hardware and controlled environment. f. Real-time operating system software. g. Real-time clock/calendar and network time synchronization. h. Controller diagnostic software. i. Data trending, reporting, and buffering software. 3. All points and functions that make up a functional system (typically that shown on one control schematic) shall be included in one controller to qualify for this stand-alone func- tionality. Where control sequences depend on global variables such as OAT, the control- ler shall have the capability of either using the last value or a default value. Design pro- fessional shall specifically indicate point groupings for stand-alone capability. Examples of required functional point groupings are: Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-4 a. All points and functions required to control an air handler with all directly associ- ated supply, return, and exhaust fans. This excludes the terminals that may be as- sociated with that air handler. Values that may be received across the network in- clude, humidity, emergency power source indication, terminal based reset parame- ters, smoke modes. b. All points associated with the supply side of a hydronic system: pumps, flow me- ters, temperature and pressure sensors, proof indications, valves etc. This ex- cludes the terminals on that hydronic system. Values that may be received across the network include, OAT and humidity, emergency power source indication, ter- minal based reset parameters. c. All points and functions required to control one terminal system including damp- ers, valves, flow meters, temperature and humidity sensors, etc. This does not in- clude the scheduling period or any OA that may be necessary for control. 4. Controller software must be capable of detecting hardware and software failures and forc- ing all outputs to a predetermined state, consistent with the failure mode requirements de- fined on the drawings. In this state it shall issue an alarm. 5. Controllers must include sufficient memory for all required operation and all required trending, when trending is buffered in the controller. Where control system operation is hindered by the shortage of memory, contractor shall, at no cost to the Owner, either up- grade the memory or provide multiple controllers. The mix of points for multiple con- trollers shall not violate the stand-alone requirements. Volatile memory is required to be backed up in the event of power loss. Software stored in non-volatile memory will not have to be downloaded from the central server after an interruption of power occurs. 6. Controllers used for time-scheduled operations must be equipped with a battery backed internal real-time clock function to provide a time base for implementing time-dependent programs. Provision shall be made for the routine updating of the controllers’ clocks via a time master. 7. Resumption of power after an outage shall cause the controllers to automatically restart and establish communications as needed by their applications. Controller shutdown based on a self-diagnosed failure in the power supply, hardware, or software must set each piece of controlled equipment to a predetermined failure mode. 8. Controllers shall be powered from the most reliable source that powers any of the sys- tems it serves. In the situation where a controller will be required to continuously collect data to be transmitted to a workstation, or where it monitors critical recovery information such as the presence of emergency power, it may be necessary to provide a UPS for the controller as well as any critical sensors. Where panels are provided with a different power source as the equipment (such as when the panel is on a UPS), the panel shall be provided with a means of monitoring the power source to the controlled equipment. This can be a dedicated power monitor or a value coming from transfer switch contacts. 9. I/O (physical and virtual) database: Inputs and outputs shall have the capability to be overridden for emergency modes and testing. 10. Programming: The programming shall be logically segmented, documented, and titled, and expand on the specified sequence of operations. Each segment shall contain control logic for a specific controlled component of a system. This is to improve the ability of the end user to understand and interpret the logic easily. All software shall be submitted to the engineer and commissioning agent for review. 11. Trending: To support commissioning and building data mining, the BACS shall be capa- ble of trending and archiving all points on building- and system-level controllers at a minimum of 15 minute intervals. The BACS shall also have the capability of trending at least five points on each field-level controller at an interval of 15 minutes. The trend data Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-5 shall be uploaded to a central database as needed to prevent buffer overflow in the con- troller. Controller memory capability, network architecture, and communications band- width shall be designed to account for this trending. 12. Trend Graphs: Web-based software shall provide for displaying graphic plots of the trended values. The software shall support multiple scales, points and point types simul- taneously. Control vendor shall configure these graphs in a logical manner for each sys- tem. Consult with the commissioning team members and project manager for required configuration. Provide a trend for every analog control loop that includes the setpoint, process variable, and control output. 13. Real-time Plotting: Software shall be provided for real time plotting/graphing of multiple values in user-defined time intervals. These graphs will typically be used in commission- ing to observe loop responses and system reactions. Control vendor shall configure these graphs in a logical manner for each system. Consult with the commissioning team mem- bers and project manager for required configuration. 14. Web-based Graphics: a. Provide floor plan screens for each floor and/or section of the building. Indicate the location of all equipment that is not located on the equipment room screens. Indicate the location of temperature sensors and VAV boxes associated with each temperature-controlled zone (i.e., VAV terminals, fan-coils, single-zone AHU’s etc.) on the floor plan screens. Display the space temperature point adjacent to each temperature sensor symbol. Indicate room numbers as provided by Cornell University. Provide a graphic link from each zone and/or equipment symbol shown on the graphic floor plan screens to each corresponding equipment sche- matic graphic screen b. Provide floor plan screens for each mechanical equipment room and, if mechani- cal equipment is situated there, the roof. Indicate the location of each item of me- chanical equipment. Provide a link from each equipment symbol shown on the plan view screen to each corresponding mechanical system schematic graphic. c. If multiple floor plans are necessary to show all areas, provide a graphic building key plan. Use elevation views and/or plan views as necessary to graphically indi- cate the location of all of the larger scale floor plans. Link the graphic building key plan to larger scale partial floor plans. Provide links from each larger scale floor plan graphic to the building key plan and to each of the other graphic floor plan screens. d. Provide a graphic site plan with links to and from each building graphic. e. Provide system schematic graphics for each air handling system. Indicate OA temperature and enthalpy, and mode of operation as applicable (i.e., occupied, un- occupied, warm-up, cool-down, etc.). Link screens for air handlers to the heating system and cooling system graphics Link screens for supply and exhaust sys- tems, if they are not available in a single graphic. f. Provide a system schematic graphic for each HVAC subsystem controlled. Each I/O point in the project shall appear in at least one graphic. System graphics shall include flow diagrams with status, setpoints, current analog input and output val- ues, operator commands, etc., as applicable. General layout of the system shall be schematically correct. I/O devices shall be shown in their schematically correct locations. Include appropriate engineering units for each displayed point value. Verbose names (English language descriptors) shall be included for each point on all graphics; this may be accomplished by the use of a pop-up window accessed by selecting the displayed point with the cursor. Indicate all adjustable setpoints on the applicable system schematic graphic or, if space does not allow, on a sup- Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-6 plemental linked setpoint screen. All outputs shall be represented in terms of per- cent open and include a pop-up link to the control logic. g. Provide a system schematic graphic for each hydronic system. h. Provide a system schematic graphic for each terminal unit. In addition to points associated with the unit, indicate mode of operation as applicable (i.e., normal oc- cupied, unoccupied, warm-up, maximum heating, maximum cooling, etc.). Pro- vide links between the applicable floor plan screen and this screen. Also provide links to the graphics representing the parent systems. i. Link system schematic screens for heating and cooling system graphics to utility history reports showing current and monthly energy usage, demands, peak values, etc. j. Link system schematic screens to all schedules and setpoints B. Local Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with electronically programmable, nonvolatile, read-only memory; and backup power source. 1. Units monitor or control each I/O point, process information, and download from or upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit. 2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions include the following: a. Global communications. b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O. c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points. 3. Local operator interface provides for download from or upload to operator workstation. C. I/O Interface: Hardwired inputs and outputs may tie into system through controllers. Protect points so that shorting will cause no damage to controllers. 1. Binary Inputs: Allow monitoring of on-off signals without external power. 2. Pulse Accumulation Inputs: Accept up to 10 pulses per second. 3. Analog Inputs: Allow monitoring of low-voltage (0- to 10-V dc), current (4 to 20 mA), or resistance signals. 4. Binary Outputs: Provide on-off or pulsed low-voltage signal, selectable for normally open or normally closed operation with three-position (on-off-auto) override switches and status lights. 5. Analog Outputs: Provide modulating signal, either low voltage (0- to 10-V dc) or current (4 to 20 mA) with status lights, two-position (auto-manual) switch, and manually adjustable potentiometer. 6. Tri-State Outputs: Provide two coordinated binary outputs for control of three-point, floating-type electronic actuators. 7. Universal I/Os: Provide software selectable binary or analog outputs. D. Power Supplies: Transformers with Class 2 current-limiting type or overcurrent protection; limit connected loads to 80 percent of rated capacity. DC power supply shall match output current and voltage requirements and be full-wave rectifier type with the following: 1. Output ripple of 5.0 mV maximum peak to peak. 2. Combined 1 percent line and load regulation with 100-mic.sec. response time for 50 percent load changes. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-7 3. Built-in overvoltage and overcurrent protection and be able to withstand 150 percent overload for at least 3 seconds without failure. 4. Ability to produce at least 33% more current than required by the transmitters and controls being installed. 5. Output regulation shall be less than 0.5 mV. 6. Certification that the equipment will not cause, as a result of its operation, either directly or indirectly, electrical interference to be induced into the building’s electrical power systems. E. Power Line Filtering: Internal or external transient voltage and surge suppression for workstations or controllers with the following: 1. Minimum dielectric strength of 1000 V. 2. Maximum response time of 10 nanoseconds. 3. Minimum transverse-mode noise attenuation of 65 dB. 4. Minimum common-mode noise attenuation of 150 dB at 40 to 100 Hz. 2.4 UNITARY CONTROLLERS A. Unitized, capable of stand-alone operation with sufficient memory to support its operating system, database, and programming requirements, and with sufficient I/O capacity for the application. 1. Configuration: Local keypad and display; diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor; wiring termination to terminal strip or card connected with ribbon cable; memory with bios; and 72-hour battery backup. 2. Operating System: Manage I/O communication to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual object information and allow central monitoring and alarms.Perform automatic system diagnostics; monitor system and report failures. 3. Enclosure: Dustproof rated for operation at 32 to 120 deg F (0 to 50 deg C). 2.5 ANALOG CONTROLLERS A. Step Controllers: 6- or 10-stage type, with heavy-duty switching rated to handle loads and operated by electric motor. B. Electric, Outdoor-Reset Controllers: Remote-bulb or bimetal rod-and-tube type, proportioning action with adjustable throttling range, adjustable set point, scale range minus 10 to plus 70 deg F (minus 23 to plus 21 deg C), and single- or double-pole contacts. C. Electronic Controllers: Wheatstone-bridge-amplifier type, in steel enclosure with provision for remote-resistance readjustment. Identify adjustments on controllers, including proportional band and authority. 1. Single controllers can be integral with control motor if provided with accessible control readjustment potentiometer. D. Fan-Speed Controllers: Solid-state model providing field-adjustable proportional control of motor speed from maximum to minimum of 55 percent and on-off action below minimum fan Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-8 speed. Controller shall briefly apply full voltage, when motor is started, to rapidly bring motor up to minimum speed. Equip with filtered circuit to eliminate radio interference. 2.6 ELECTRONIC SENSORS A. Description: Vibration and corrosion resistant; for wall, immersion, or duct mounting as required. B. Thermistor and RTD Temperature Sensors and Transmitters: 1. Manufacturers: a. Building Automation Products, Inc. (BAPI) b. Johnson Controls, Inc.; Controls Group c. Kele, Inc. d. MAMAC Systems, Inc. e. Precon USA f. Vaisala. g. Veris Industries 2. Resolution: When matched with A/D converter of the controller, sensor range shall provide a resolution of no less than 0.4F (unless noted otherwise). 3. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5 deg F (0.3 deg C) at calibration point. 4. Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable. 5. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, consisting of a sensing element, junction box for wiring connections, and a gasket to prevent air leakage or vibration noise. The sensor probe shall be stainless steel. 6. Averaging Elements in Ducts: Shall consist of an averaging element, junction box for wiring connections and gasket to prevent air leakage. Provide sensor lengths and quantities to result in one foot of sensing element for each two square feet of coil/duct face area. 7. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass or stainless-steel thermowell, sensor and connection head for wiring connections. 8. Room Sensors: a. Set-Point Adjustment: Provide set-point adjustment and appropriate cabling where indicated for zones. Public spaces shall not have setpoint adjustment. The setpoint adjustment shall be a warmer/cooler indication that shall be scalable via the BACS system. b. Occupancy Override: Provide button on the room sensor enclosure and appropriate cabling where indicated (this shall include all office spaces). This shall be a momentary contact closure. c. Provide the sensor with an alphanumeric display. d. Provide sensor with communications jack and appropriate cabling for connection to the BACS. 9. Outside-Air Sensors: Consisting of a sensor, sun shield, utility box, and watertight gasket to prevent water seepage. 10. Room Security Sensors: Stainless-steel cover plate with insulated back and security screws. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-9 C. Air Pressure Transmitters/Transducers: 1. Manufacturers: a. Cleveland Controls, Inc. b. Dwyer Instruments. c. MAMAC Systems, Inc. d. Setra Systems, Inc. e. Veris Industries 2. Static-Pressure Transmitter: Nondirectional sensor with suitable range for expected input, and temperature compensated. a. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of full scale with repeatability of plus or minus 0.5 percent for general and static pressure applications; Plus or minus 2 percent of full scale for filter differential applications. 3. Air Differential-Pressure Switch: Cleveland Controls, snap acting, with pilot-duty rating and with suitable scale range and differential. 4. Pressure Transmitters: Direct acting; range suitable for system; linear output 4 to 20 mA. D. Filter Bank Air Differential Pressure Indicating Transmitters: 1. Manufacturer: Dwyer 2. Gage: 4” dial face, 5” overall OD, diaphragm or strain gauge, a. Stability: Plus or minus 1% of full scale b. Sensor Range: As required by the application. 3. Transmitter: a. Output: Linear, 4-20 mA b. Zero and Span Adjustment: Protected Potentiometer. c. Accuracy: i. Electrical: Plus or minus 0.5% of full scale ii. Mechanical: Plus or minus 2% of full scale E. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers. 1. Set-Point Adjustment: Exposed. 2. Set-Point Indication: Exposed. 3. Thermometer: Concealed. 4. Color: White. 5. Orientation: Horizontal. F. Room sensor accessories include the following: 1. Insulating Bases: For sensors located on exterior walls. 2. Guards: Locking; heavy-duty, transparent plastic; mounted on separate base. 3. Adjusting Key: As required for calibration and cover screws. G. Airflow Sensors with Differential Air Pressure Transmitters/Transducers: Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-10 1. Manufacturers: a. Air Monitor Corporation. b. Paragon Controls Incorporated. 2. Airflow Grid: a. Air traverse probes shall be pitot-tube averaging type, containing multiple total and static pressure sensors. Material of construction shall be suitable for the application. Fan inlet grids shall be used where possible to measure fan airflow. b. Stations shall be AMCA certified. c. Accuracy: Plus or minus 2 percent for duct mounted applications, and plus or minus 3 percent for fan inlet applications. d. Airflow Straightner: Provide where indicated. 3. Differential Pressure and Flow Transmitter: a. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.25 percent of natural span, including non-linearity, hysteresis, deadband, and non-repeatability. b. Stability: Plus or minus 0.5% of full scale per year or less. c. Shall have an automatic zeroing circuit capable of electronically adjusting the transmitter zero at predetermined time intervals while simultaneously holding the transmitted output signal. 2.7 AUXILIARY DEVICES A. Control Relays: Functional Devices, UL listed plug-in type with dust cover and LED “energized” indicator. Contact rating, configuration and coil voltage shall be suitable for the application. 2.8 STATUS SENSORS A. Status Inputs for Variable Volume Fans (Motors): Status indication shall be derived from contacts on the VFD. B. Status Inputs for Variable Volume Pumps (Motors): Status indication shall be derived from contacts on the VFD. C. Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Comply with ISA 50.00.01, current-sensing fixed- or split- core transformers with self-powered transmitter, adjustable and suitable for 175 percent of rated motor current. D. Voltage Transmitter (100- to 600-V ac): Comply with ISA 50.00.01, single-loop, self-powered transmitter, adjustable, with suitable range and 1 percent full-scale accuracy. E. Power Monitor: 3-phase type with disconnect/shorting switch assembly, listed voltage and current transformers, with pulse kilowatt hour output and 4- to 20-mA kW output, with maximum 2 percent error at 1.0 power factor and 2.5 percent error at 0.5 power factor. F. Current Switches: Veris Industries - Hawkeye, self-powered, solid-state with adjustable trip current, selected to match current and system output requirements. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-11 G. Electronic Valve/Damper Position Indicator: Visual scale indicating percent of travel and 2- to 10-V dc, feedback signal. 2.9 GAS DETECTION EQUIPMENT A. Manufacturers: 1. Vaisala. 2. Veris Industries. 3. Wattstopper B. Occupancy Sensors: 1. Manufacturer: Wattstopper. 2. BAS/HVAC applications in wet / dry laboratories, small to medium classrooms, offices, and comparable spaces shall be Wattstopper Model CI-24, ceiling mounted, 24 VAC, passive infrared. 3. Combination BAS/HVAC and lighting applications in wet / dry laboratories, small to medium classrooms, offices, and comparable spaces shall be Wattstopper Model CI-200, ceiling mounted, 24 VAC, passive infrared with a Wattstopper B120E-P power pack. 4. BAS/HVAC or combination BAS/HVAC and lighting applications in auditoriums, lecture halls, large classrooms, and comparable spaces shall be Wattstopper Model DT- 200, wall mounted, 24 VAC, dual technology (passive infrared/ultrasonic). For combination BAS/HVAC and lighting applications, a Wattstopper B120E-P power pack shall be used. 2.10 THERMOSTATS A. Manufacturers: 1. Erie Controls. 2. Danfoss Inc.; Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Div. 3. Heat-Timer Corporation. 4. Sauter Controls Corporation. 5. tekmar Control Systems, Inc. 6. Theben AG - Lumilite Control Technology, Inc. B. Electric, solid-state, microcomputer-based room thermostat with remote sensor. 1. Automatic switching from heating to cooling. 2. Preferential rate control to minimize overshoot and deviation from set point. 3. Set up for four separate temperatures per day. 4. Instant override of set point for continuous or timed period from 1 hour to 31 days. 5. Short-cycle protection. 6. Programming based on every day of week. 7. Selection features include degree F or degree C display, 12- or 24-hour clock, keyboard disable, remote sensor, and fan on-auto. 8. Battery replacement without program loss. 9. Thermostat display features include the following: Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-12 a. Time of day. b. Actual room temperature. c. Programmed temperature. d. Programmed time. e. Duration of timed override. f. Day of week. g. System mode indications include "heating," "off," "fan auto," and "fan on." C. Room Thermostat Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers. 1. Set-Point Adjustment: Exposed. 2. Set-Point Indication: Exposed. 3. Thermometer: Concealed. 4. Color: White. 5. Orientation: Horizontal. D. Room thermostat accessories include the following: 1. Insulating Bases: For thermostats located on exterior walls. 2. Thermostat Guards: Locking; heavy-duty, transparent plastic; mounted on separate base. 3. Adjusting Key: As required for calibration and cover screws. 4. Set-Point Adjustment: 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) diameter, adjustment knob. 2.11 ACTUATORS A. Electric Motors: Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or two-position action. 1. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." 2. Permanent Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil immersed and sealed. Equip spring-return motors with integral spiral-spring mechanism in housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit switches, auxiliary switches, or feedback potentiometer. 3. Nonspring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): Size for running torque of 150 in. x lbf (16.9 N x m) and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf (33.9 N x m). 4. Spring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): Size for running and breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf (16.9 N x m). 5. Nonspring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft. (2.3 sq. m): Size for running torque of 150 in. x lbf (16.9 N x m) and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf (33.9 N x m). 6. Spring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft. (2.3 sq. m): Size for running and breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf (16.9 N x m). B. Electronic Actuators: Direct-coupled type designed for minimum 60,000 full-stroke cycles at rated torque, and be UL 873 listed. Provide stroke indicator. Actuators shall have a positive positioning circuit and selectable inputs. Full stroke shall be within 90 seconds. Where fail positions are required, provide spring return on the actuator with adequate close off force. 1. Manufacturers: Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-13 a. Belimo Aircontrols (USA), Inc. 2. Valves: Size for torque required for valve close off at maximum pump differential pressure. 3. Dampers: Size for running torque calculated as follows: a. Parallel-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 7 inch-lb/sq. ft. (86.8 kg-cm/sq. m) of damper. b. Opposed-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 5 inch-lb/sq. ft. (62 kg-cm/sq. m) of damper. c. Parallel-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 4 inch-lb/sq. ft (49.6 kg-cm/sq. m) of damper. d. Opposed-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 3 inch-lb/sq. ft. (37.2 kg-cm/sq. m) of damper. e. Dampers with 2- to 3-Inch wg (500 to 750 Pa) of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 1000 to 2500 fpm (5 to 13 m/s): Increase running torque by 1.5. f. Dampers with 3- to 4-Inch wg (750 to 1000 Pa) of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 2500 to 3000 fpm (13 to 15 m/s): Increase running torque by 2.0. 4. Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle. 5. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry. 6. Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism. Provide external, manual gear release on nonspring-return actuators. 7. Power Requirements (Two-Position Spring Return): 24-V ac. 8. Power Requirements (Modulating): Maximum 10 VA at 24-V ac or 8 W at 24-V dc. 9. Proportional Signal: 2- to 10-V dc or 4 to 20 mA, and 2- to 10-V dc position feedback signal. 10. Temperature Rating: Minus 22 to plus 122 deg F (Minus 30 to plus 50 deg C). 11. Temperature Rating (Smoke Dampers): Minus 22 to plus 250 deg F (Minus 30 to plus 121 deg C). 12. Run Time: 30 seconds. 2.12 CONTROL VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Belimo Aircontrols (USA), Inc. 2. Valve Solutions, Inc. B. Control Valves: Factory fabricated, of type, body material, and pressure class based on maximum pressure and temperature rating of piping system, unless otherwise indicated. C. Hydronic system characterizing disk valves (BELIMO) shall have the following characteristics: 1. NPS 3 and Smaller: Forged Brass - nickel plated body, stainless steel ball and stem, fiberglass reinforced Teflon (PTFE) seat, 400 psi pressure rating, 0 °F to 212 °F media temperature range, equal percentage flow characteristic on two-way valves, linear flow characteristic on three-way valves. D. Hydronic system segmented ball valves (VSI) shall have the following characteristics: Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-14 1. NPS 1 thru 6: Carbon steel body, stainless steel V-notch ball and shaft, low friction bearings, graphite ball seat, -20 °F to 450 °F media temperature range, 300:1 turndown ratio, equal percentage flow characteristic. E. Butterfly Valves: 200-psig (1380-kPa), 150-psig (1034-kPa) maximum pressure differential, ASTM A 126 cast-iron or ASTM A 536 ductile-iron body and bonnet, extended neck, stainless- steel stem, field-replaceable EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals. 1. Body Style: Wafer. 2. Disc Type: Aluminum bronze. 3. Sizing: 1-psig (7-kPa) maximum pressure drop at design flow rate. 2.13 DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 2. Johnson Controls, Inc.; Controls Group. 3. Nailor Industries Inc. 4. Ruskin Company. B. Dampers: AMCA-rated, parallel or opposed-blade design as indicated; 16 gage minimum galvanized-steel frame with holes for duct mounting; damper blades shall not be less than 16 gage thick galvanized steel. 1. Secure blades to 1/2-inch diameter, zinc-plated axles using zinc-plated hardware, with synthetic blade bearings, blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass, ends sealed against spring-stainless-steel blade bearings, and thrust bearings at each end of every blade. 2. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 25 to plus 180 deg F. 3. Blade Seals, Standard Pressure Applications: Synthetic, PVC coated polyester fabric, extruded PVC, or extruded vinyl. 4. Damper shall meet AMCA-500 Class II, with a maximum leakage rate of 10 cfm per sq. ft. of damper area, at a differential pressure of 1-inch w.g. C. Dampers: AMCA-rated, parallel or opposed-blade design as indicated; 16 gage minimum galvanized-steel frame with holes for duct mounting; damper blades shall be airfoil shaped, double skin construction of 14 gage equivalent thick galvanized steel. 1. Secure blades to 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) diameter, zinc-plated axles using zinc-plated hardware; with synthetic, stainless steel, or self-lubricating bronze bearings; blade- linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass, ends sealed against spring-stainless-steel blade bearings, and thrust bearings at each end of every blade. 2. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 25 to plus 180 deg F. 3. Blade Seals, Low-Leakage Applications: Use extruded PVC, synthetic, or silicone. 4. Damper shall meet AMCA-500 Class IA, with a maximum leakage rate of 3 cfm per sq. ft. of damper area, at a differential pressure of 1-inch w.g. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-15 2.14 LABORATORY AIRFLOW CONTROL DEVICES A. Fume Hood Monitors: 1. Manufacturers: Phoenix Controls Corporation, Air Monitor 2. The hood monitor shall be capable of continuous monitoring and control of the hood face velocity, and provide flow and alarm outputs for remote monitoring. 3. The monitor keypad shall provide three forms of visual data as follows: hood operating mode (normal, setback, emergency); digital display of measured hood face velocity; and three high visibility LED’s to indicate normal, caution, and alarm conditions. 4. Monitor shall be capable of face velocity setback. B. Sash Position Sensors: 1. Manufacturers: Phoenix Controls Corporation 2. The sash position sensor shall be capable of detecting the fume hood’s sash position in order to maintain a constant face velocity across the fume hood. 3. Sensor shall consist of a potentiometer coupled with a stainless steel, nylon-jacketed cable attached to a vertically-rising fume hood sash. 2.15 CONTROL CABLE A. Electronic and fiber-optic cables for control wiring are specified in Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Verify location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with Drawings and room details before installation. Install devices 48 inches (1220 mm) above the floor. 1. Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern. B. Install guards on thermostats in the following locations: 1. Entrances. 2. Public areas. 3. Where indicated. C. Install automatic dampers according to Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." D. Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed to outdoor temperatures. E. Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment." F. Install hydronic instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping." Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-16 G. Install refrigerant instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Division 23 Section "Refrigerant Piping." H. Install duct volume-control dampers according to Division 23 Sections specifying air ducts. I. Install electronic and fiber-optic cables according to Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling." 3.2 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION A. Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." B. Install building wire and cable according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." C. Install signal and communication cable according to Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling." 1. All control wiring in mechanical equipment rooms or other spaces in which it is readily accessible shall be installed in electrical metal tubing (EMT) with compression fittings. 2. All control wiring run in interstitial spaces shall either be run in EMT or a cable tray or raceway. 3. All control wiring installed outdoors or any area subject to moisture shall be installed per code. 4. All control wiring installed in vertical chases shall be installed in EMT. 5. All control wiring above non-accessible ceilings shall be installed in EMT. 6. All control wiring installed above accessible ceiling spaces which are not laboratories or AHU’s shall be plenum type, not installed in conduit, but neatly run with generous use of rings or ties. 7. Wire shall be unspliced from the controller to the sensor or device. 8. Control wiring shall not be routed in the same raceway as power wiring. 9. Control wiring shall be color coded and labeled at all points of termination. 10. Remove and properly dispose of all abandoned control wiring, conduit, tubing, boxes, enclosures, components, and other controls-related work. 11. Conceal cable, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping are exposed. 12. Install exposed cable in raceway. 13. Install concealed cable in raceway. 14. Bundle and harness multiconductor instrument cable in place of single cables where several cables follow a common path. 15. Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge side; protect against abrasion. Tie and support conductors. 16. Number-code or color-code conductors for future identification and service of control system, except local individual room control cables. 17. Install wire and cable with sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of piping and equipment. D. Connect manual-reset limit controls independent of manual-control switch positions. Automatic duct heater resets may be connected in interlock circuit of power controllers. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-17 E. Connect hand-off-auto selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch is in hand position. F. Responsibilities: The BASC contractor wiring responsibilities shall include the following: 1. All wiring from mechanical and electrical alarms and functions (as scheduled on the drawings) as required to report these alarms and functions to the BACS head-end. 2. All line and low voltage wiring for the control of all HVAC motors (whether individual or as part of packaged equipment), automatic control valves, and dampers, including: wiring for EPs, PEs, relays, controllers, thermostats, actuating devices, unit heater controls, and cabinet heater controls, except as noted below. 3. Power supply wiring to electric damper motors that is specifically excluded from the electrical trade work. 4. All power supply wiring for all ATC components. G. Responsibilities: The Electrical contractor wiring responsibilities shall include the following: 1. "Lock-out stop" control wiring. 2. A separate system of wiring for smoke and fire control of motors which are to be automatically and/or manually controlled by the fire protective alarm system will be run to the motor starters or BACS enclosures. 3. A separate system of wiring for smoke and fire control of dampers that are to be automatically and/or manually controlled directly by the fire protective alarm system (i.e., not in response to motor operation). 3.3 CONTROL PANELS A. Enclosures: 1. All BACS panels shall be metal enclosures containing the controller, I/O modules, power supplies, termination strips, battery (if not integral to the controller or I/O module) and a spare AC outlet. 2. All penetrations of the BACS or outboard gear panels in mechanical rooms shall be from the bottom of the enclosure with wireway and conduit stubs from the wireway up to the panel. 3. All transformers and power supplies shall be mounted outside of the central panel. 4. Enclosures located in mechanical rooms shall be NEMA 4. 5. Enclosures located in labs and other relatively dust free and dry spaces may be NEMA 1. 6. Enclosures shall be mounted on walls or free-standing supports. 7. Provide enclosures with key lockable doors. B. Panel Fabrication 1. The Contractor shall size the panel such that no more than 80% of the surface of the enclosure back plate is used. 2. Plastic wire way (e.g., Panduit) shall be used to organize all wiring in the panel. 3. Sufficient wire way shall be provided in the panel such that it is filled no more than 80% capacity. 4. Panel layout and construction shall be neat and professional. 5. All controllers, wiring, and components in the panels shall be labeled. All labeling shall match the reference numbers on the cabinet drawings that shall be provided for each panel. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-18 6. Label the power source and circuit number for each panel. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing. B. The controls vendor shall provide control trends during start up and prior to functional performance testing of the systems. Reports shall be scheduled to output the data to a common format such as comma separated text, Microsoft formats such as Excel and Access, and portable database format. Trended data may also be archived in an Owner-accessible SQL database. C. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. 3. Test calibration of controllers by disconnecting input sensors and stimulating operation with compatible signal generator. 4. Test each point through its full operating range to verify that safety and operating control set points are as required. 5. Test each control loop to verify stable mode of operation and compliance with sequence of operation. Adjust PID actions. 6. Test each system for compliance with sequence of operation. 7. Test software and hardware interlocks. D. DDC Verification and Commissioning: 1. Provide all logic, graphics, and trends for review prior to the start of field commissioning activities. 2. Provide a complete calibration and operational check for each individual point and function contained within the BACS. 3. Conduct the checkout with the use of point/function log sheets to be prepared by the BAS contractor. The Owner shall approve the log sheet format. 4. Submit log sheets to the Owner prior to the commencement of any final acceptance testing. 5. Certify, in writing, to the Owner prior to the commencement of final acceptance testing that all components of the BACS system are functioning as per the requirements of the contract documents. 6. Provide to the Owner as-built drawings and documentation at least four (4) weeks prior to the commencement of any final BACS acceptance testing. 7. Verify that instruments are installed before calibration, testing, and loop or leak checks. 8. Check instruments for proper location and accessibility. 9. Check instrument installation for direction of flow, elevation, orientation, insertion depth, and other applicable considerations. 10. Check instrument tubing for proper fittings, slope, material, and support. 11. Check pressure instruments, piping slope, installation of valve manifold, and self- contained pressure regulators. 12. Check temperature instruments and material and length of sensing elements. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-19 13. Check control valves. Verify that they are in correct direction. 14. Check air-operated dampers. Verify that pressure gages are provided and that proper blade alignment, either parallel or opposed, has been provided. 15. Check DDC system as follows: a. Verify that DDC controller power supply is from emergency power supply, if applicable. b. Verify that wires at control panels are tagged with their service designation and approved tagging system. c. Verify that spare I/O capacity has been provided. d. Verify that DDC controllers are protected from power supply surges. e. The Contractor shall check out the installation with a representative from Cornell University. The checkout shall consist of verifying the ability of the BACS to communicate with the central EMCS system, verifying the calibration of each sensor and/or transmitter, and verifying the operation of each control point. E. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment and repeat testing procedures. F. The BACS contractor shall issue a report upon project completion stating that the system is complete, has been adjusted, and has had all hardware and software functions verified, that all analog control loops are tuned, and is operating in accordance with the specifications. Any deviations from specified settings or operations necessitated during system adjustment shall be specifically noted. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC instrumentation and controls. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training." B. All software processes shall be thoroughly demonstrated to the Owner’s representative. Alarm conditions shall be simulated for conformance. Analog control points shall be exercised through their entire range. All control interlocks and sequences shall be completely verified. The checkout shall be a thorough and exhaustive review of the installation to assure proper operation of the total system. C. The amount of training that shall be provided shall match the size of the project (e.g., no less than eight hours for small projects and up to 80 hours for large projects). D. The contractor shall make available to the Owner regular, scheduled training courses for ongoing training of the Owner’s operating personnel. Programs shall include hardware- and software-oriented courses as well as energy conservation and management courses. E. In addition to the normal training listed above, all vendors will be required to provide two weeks of training at the BACS manufacturer’s training facility for four people. This training only needs to be provided once for a particular set of installed BACS products. If a contractor has provided this training previously (on a previous project or directly with the Owner) then the additional training does not need to be provided again. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-20 END OF SECTION 230900 Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 BACS COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 230901-1 SECTION 230901 – BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This section provides the communication and interoperability requirements for building automation and control system components to be supplied to Cornell. Because the University's systems have evolved over many years and involve products from multiple vendors and, in several cases, multiple generations of control systems from single vendors, attention must be given to the integration of the old and the new. The objectives of this integration include: providing a mechanism for competitive procurement of building control products; assisting in meeting the University's energy conservation and environmental protection goals; improving the operational systems available to our facilities management and operations staff; reducing, if possible, overall facilities management costs; and providing an infrastructure for optimizing performance in a deregulated utility environment. B. The objectives shall be met by the use, to the extent possible, of existing, widely accepted data communication standards and practices. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2001: BACnet® - A Data Communication Protocol for Building Automation and Control Networks, as amended, and hereinafter referred to as "BACnet". American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. 2001. B. ATA/ANSI 878.1 (1992), ARCNET Local Area Network. C. ISO/IEC 8802-3 (1993), Information processing systems - Local area networks - Part 3: Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specifications. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. General: In addition to the definitions contained in the applicable standards listed in paragraph 1.03, the following should be noted: 1. ARCNET. Attached Resource Computer Network. See BACnet, Clause 8 and ATA/ANSI 878.1. 2. BACnet/IP. BACnet Annex J Devices. Annex J of BACnet describes how BACnet devices can make use of IP directly for communicating across IP-based internets. 3. BACnet PICS. A Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement that describes the BACnet capabilities of a specific device. See BACnet, Annex A. 4. BACS. Building Automation and Control System. 5. BBMD. BACnet Broadcast Management Device. See BACnet, Annex J. 6. BMA. BACnet Manufacturers Association. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 BACS COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 230901-2 7. BTL. The BACnet Testing Laboratories of the BMA. The organization responsible for testing products to assure that they conform to the BACnet standard. Listings of tested products are available at www.bacnetassociation.org. 8. Campus Backbone. A fiber optic data communication infrastructure on the Cornell campus managed by CIT. Users connect to the backbone by means of CIT-supplied Ethernet concentrators in each building and appropriate 10/100BASE-T unshielded, twisted pair wiring. The backbone uses the Internet Protocol for routing messages to and from computers both on and off the Cornell campus. 9. CIT. Cornell Information Technologies. The organization that manages the Cornell campus networking infrastructure, including the provision of network connections in Cornell buildings. 10. Computer Section. The computer group within the Cornell Utilities and Energy Management Department. The Computer Section is responsible for the EMCS and the coordination of BACS device addressing and network numbering. 11. BIBB. BACnet Interoperability Building Block. A collection of one or more BACnet services defined for the purpose of describing communication functionality in an unambiguous way. See BACnet, Annex K. 12. Device Profile. A collection of BIBBs that describes the minimum BACnet capabilities of a particular device in order to achieve reliable communication in one of five specified "interoperability areas." Devices include BACnet Building Controllers (B-BC), BACnet Advanced Application Controllers (B-AAC), and BACnet Application Specific Controllers (B-ASC). See BACnet, Annex L. 13. EMCS. A computer complex, housed at Chilled Water Plant 1, that provides Energy Management and Control System functions for the University. The EMCS is connected to the campus backbone and uses the Internet Protocol (IP) for the routing of messages to and from individual buildings. 14. Ethernet. A carrier sensing multiple access with collision detection network technology defined by ISO/IEC 8802-3. 15. Gateway. A device that translates BACnet messages into those of a non-BACnet protocol and vice-versa. 16. Internetwork. A set of two or more BACnet networks interconnected by routers. 17. Interoperability Area. A communications domain in which functional cooperation is desired. These areas are currently: 1) data sharing; 2) alarm and event management; 3) trending; 4) scheduling; and 5) device and network management. See BACnet, Clause 22. 18. IP. The Internet Protocol. A networking protocol originally developed by the federal Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency. BACnet messages can traverse the campus backbone by being encapsulated in routable IP packets. 19. Local. Pertaining to the requirements of a specific job or building project. 20. LAN. Local Area Network. One of the approved BACnet network technologies: Ethernet, ARCNET or MS/TP. 21. MS/TP. Master-Slave/Token-Passing Network. One of the approved BACnet LANs. See BACnet, Clause 9. 22. Network. One of the communication technologies for data communications specified in BACnet. Approved network technologies at Cornell are Ethernet, ARCNET and MS/TP. 23. PICS. Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement. A document that describes in detail a device's BACnet capabilities. See BACnet, Annex A. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 BACS COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 230901-3 24. UDP. The User Datagram Protocol. One of the IP family of protocols. UDP is used to convey BACnet/IP messages and is characterized by a "port number" for each protocol. BACnet/IP typically uses UDP port X'BAC0' or decimal 47808. 25. VLAN. Virtual Local Area Network. A network configuration that allows devices to communicate across multiple physical local area networks (LANs) using their hardware or "medium access control" (MAC) addresses as if they shared a common networking medium. As with a physical LAN, "local" broadcast messages are also propagated to each of the participating LANs. VLAN capability depends on the configuration of the interconnecting data communication equipment. VLAN configuration is performed by CIT. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. In addition to any requirements specified elsewhere, the Contractor shall provide both proposed and as-built versions of the following: 1. Schematic drawings that represent the system architecture and configuration in both hardcopy and editable electronic format. 2. A points list that includes, for each physical or logical point, the name, description, display units, alarm limits and definitions, along with the BACnet object description, object ID, and associated device ID. The list shall also indicate whether Trend Log or Schedule objects have been established for the point. 3. Documentation for any non-standard BACnet objects, properties, or enumerations utilized detailing their structure, data types, and any associated lists of enumerated values. 4. PICS files indicating the BACnet functionality and configuration of each device. In addition to the requirements of BACnet, Annex A, the Contractor shall provide information on any limitations on the numbers of supported objects in a given device including, specifically, Trend Log and Schedule objects. 5. Documentation on submitted products that have been tested and listed by the BACnet Testing Laboratory (BTL), or provide a letter on manufacturer’s company letterhead indicating the anticipated date by which testing is expected to be completed. If, for any reason, BTL testing and listing has not been completed, a written commitment shall be provided to upgrade installed controls to a version that meets BTL testing and listing requirements should deficiencies be found during BTL testing. 1.5 COORDINATION A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all coordination of subcontractors’ work relative to the BACS. Specific questions relating to communication and interoperability shall be submitted to the Computer Section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Each networked device supplied pursuant to this section shall be installed and configured so as to correctly execute all sequences of operation for its intended application, as defined in other sections of this specification. In addition, each networked device shall Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 BACS COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 230901-4 provide, at a minimum, the BACnet communication capabilities prescribed in the device profiles for devices of its type. See 2.02. 2.2 SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Controller Requirements: Controller devices supplied to meet the functional and operational requirements of this specification shall conform, at a minimum, to one the BACnet device profiles contained in BACnet, Annex L: BACnet Building Controller (B-BC), BACnet Advanced Application Controller (B-AAC), or BACnet Application Specific Controller (B-ASC). The interoperability requirements of such devices are contained in BACnet, Annex L. B-BC controller devices shall communicate using BACnet/IP. Other devices may use BACnet over ARCNET or BACnet over MS/TP. B. Router Requirements: In the event that devices are provided that do not use BACnet/IP over Ethernet as their communication technology, BACnet routers shall be provided that route between BACnet/IP over Ethernet and the other BACnet LAN type(s), whether ARCNET or MS/TP. These routers shall conform to the specifications of BACnet, Clause 6. C. Gateways: BACS devices that use BACnet as their native protocol are preferred. The use of gateways, in circumstances where no native BACnet devices are available, requires the specific approval of the Owner in each instance. D. Workstation Requirements: The EMCS operator interface is the responsibility of the Computer Section. If, however, a specific job requires a local workstation, the Contractor shall provide a personal computer of current design and approved by the Owner equipped with a web browser that can display information from a Contractor - supplied web server that interfaces with the local BACnet network and the campus backbone, as described 2.02.E. E. Web Server Requirements: If a local workstation is required, the Contractor shall comply with 2.02.D and shall, in addition, provide a web server computer with the web page presentation, data acquisition, and storage functionality described in this section, including the specific functions listed below. The web server shall be configured in such a way that there is no limit to the number of simultaneous users. 1. Data Sharing: a. Presentation of data (i.e., user definable reports and graphics) b. The ability to monitor and display the values of all BACnet object types, including all required and optional properties c. The ability to modify setpoints and parameters 2. Alarm and Event Management: a. Operator notification and presentation of event information b. Alarm acknowledgment by operators c. Alarm summarization d. Adjustment of alarm limits e. Adjustment of alarm routing 3. Scheduling: Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 BACS COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 230901-5 a. Modification of schedules b. Display of the start and stop times (schedule) of scheduled devices 4. Trending: a. Modification of the parameters of a trend log b. Display and archive of trend log data 5. Device and Network Management: a. Display of information about the status of any device on the l ocal BACnet network b. Display of information about any object in the local BACnet network c. Ability to silence a device on the network that is transmitting erroneous data d. Ability to cause a remote device to reinitialize itself e. Ability to backup and restore the configuration of devices on the local BACnet network f. Ability to query and change the configuration local BACnet routers 2.3 NETWORK CONNECTIONS A. This clause prescribes the means of interconnecting building automation and control devices provided pursuant to this specification. B. LANs: 1. All control devices meeting the B-BC device profile shall be connected to an ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) LAN provided by the Contractor. This LAN, in turn, shall be connected to the campus backbone network. Unless otherwise specified, the connection shall be via a 10/100BASE-T port provided by the Owner. 2. The location of the jack will be determined in consultation with the Computer Section, which will arrange with CIT for the jack's installation. The Co ntractor shall also provide any additional data communication hardware, such as hubs and repeaters, that may be needed to interconnect the supplied BACS equipment and to connect to Owner's backbone network. 3. To facilitate maintenance technician access to the LAN, the Contractor shall also provide at least one additional 10/100BASE-T access point in each mechanical room that contains BACS equipment. This requirement may be met by supplying either a hub with a spare port or a dedicated jack. 4. Control devices that meet the B-ASC profile, but do not support Ethernet, must use another approved BACnet LAN technology. These technologies are ARCNET and MS/TP. If Ethernet is not supported on any part of the internetwork, a stand-alone BACnet router, or a BACnet Building Controller with built-in routing capability, must be provided for routing between the Ethernet and ARCNET or MS/TP LANs. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. This clause provides specific interoperability and networking requirements that pertain to the use of BACnet. 3.2 REQUIREMENTS BY INTEROPERABILITY AREA Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 BACS COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 230901-6 A. This clause provides requirements pertaining to the five interoperability areas of data sharing, alarm and event management, trending, scheduling, and device and network management. B. Data Sharing: 1. Data Sharing requirements apply to the exchange of information between BACnet devices for archival storage, generating graphics and reports, the sharing of common sensor or calculated values, carrying out interlocked control strategies, and the modification of setpoints or other operational parameters. 2. All such data to be exchanged shall be represented as BACnet objects and conveyed using BACnet messages. Only standard BACnet objects and messages may be used to implement data sharing requirements unless the non-standard extensions are explicitly approved by the Owner. Any extensions to BACnet shall be fully documented in the manner used within the BACnet standard. Submission of such documentation is a prerequisite for obtaining approval of an extension. 3. Points List: The Contractor shall provide devices installed and configured with all points indicated in the BACS points list. The Contractor shall provide any additional points needed to fully implement the sequence of operations and other functionality described in this specification. 4. Data Presentation: In the event that workstation/web server capabilities have been specified, the following characteristics shall apply to graphic displays : a. The graphic displays shall include schematic diagrams of the systems being displayed. b. When a graphic display is being viewed all values displayed shall be updated when a change of value (COV) notification is received or, if COV is not implemented, within five seconds. c. Any data value from any networked device shall be available for plotting at a workstation in real time. The operator shall be able to select binary and analog data concurrently and to plot multiple instances of each data type on the same screen. The operator shall be able to select sampling intervals from 1 second to 60 seconds. For devices that implement COV reporting, the operator shall be able to select this as the means to update the plot. 5. Monitoring of Any Property: The operator shall be able to display any value of any property of any object from any networked device including all properties required by BACnet, all supported optional properties, and any proprietary extensions. 6. Global Object Definitions: The control system shall be configured with system- wide unique BACnet objects as needed to convey all globally significant information necessary to implement the control strategy. 7. Setpoint and Parameter Modifications: Operators with appropriate authority shall be able to modify all control loop setpoints and tuning parameters via BACnet messages initiated through operator interaction with graphics displays. 8. Peer-to-Peer Data Dependencies: All BACnet devices shall be installed and configured to exchange data values directly, without the need for operator or workstation intervention, to implement the sequence of operations specified in the mechanical system drawings and to share global data values. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 BACS COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 230901-7 C. Alarm and Event Management: 1. Alarm and Event management is the exchange of data between BACnet devices related to the occurrence of predefined conditions that meet specific criteria. Such conditions are called "events" and may be the basis for the initiation of a particular control action in response, or the simple logging of the event's occurrence. The event may also be deemed to represent a condition that constitutes an "alarm" requiring human acknowledgment and intervention. 2. All alarms and events shall be implemented using standard BACnet event detection and notification mechanisms. Either intrinsic reporti ng or algorithmic change reporting may be used, but the intrinsic reporting method is preferred. See BACnet Clause 13. 3. Alarm Lists a. The Contractor shall provide devices installed and configured to detect alarms and events for the points indicated in the system drawings. Software logic shall be provided to avoid nuisance alarms, e.g., no temperature or status alarms shall be generated when fan systems are not running, or during start-up and shut-down transitions. It shall be possible to configure a delay between the occurrence of an alarm condition and its enunciation. b. Alarms shall appear at the EMCS and any local operator workstation(s) within five seconds of their occurrence. The workstations shall display an alarm message window that appears on top of any other open windows. The alarm message window shall have a distinctive color and appearance to attract the operator's attention. Operators with sufficient privilege shall be able to configure the workstation to emit an audible signal (or not) w hen an alarm message is received. c. Alarms that require operator acknowledgement shall cause the alarm window to remain active until such an acknowledgement is received. If multiple alarms are received, unacknowledged alarms shall be displayed on a first come first served basis grouped by priority, with the highest priority alarms displayed first. d. Alarms shall be distributed using the BACnet notification class mechanism. Assignment of classes and destinations shall be configured according to details provided by the Owner. One destination shall, in all cases, be the EMCS. e. BACnet provides a mechanism for prioritizing alarm and event notification messages using a numerical range of 0-255 with 0 being the highest priority and 255 being the lowest priority. The priorities presented in the Table 1 are consistent with the safety requirements of UL 864 (applies to fire systems) and UL 1076 (applies to security systems). f. Alarm and event notification priorities shall be configured in the Priority Range as indicated in Table 1 (See end of section) and shall be conveyed using the indicated Network Priority. 4. Alarm Acknowledgment: Alarms shall be acknowledged through the EMCS alarm acknowledgement process. 5. Alarm Summarization: Alarm summarization shall be handled through the EMCS alarm summarization process. 6. Alarm Parameter Adjustment: Operators with sufficient privilege shall be able to change alarm parameters for all standard BACnet event types. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 BACS COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 230901-8 7. Alarm Routing Adjustment a. Operators with sufficient privilege shall be able to change alarm routing (BACnet notification classes) for each alarm including the destination for each type of alarm and alarm priority, the day of week and time of day, and the type of transition involved (TO-OFF-NORMAL, TO-NORMAL, etc.). b. Initially, notification classes shall be configured in a manner that distinguishes between the EMCS and any local workstation, if provided. D. Scheduling: 1. Scheduling is the exchange of data between BACnet devices related to the establishment and maintenance of dates and time at which specified output actions are to be taken. All schedules shall be implemented using BACnet objects and messages. 2. Schedule Lists a. The Contractor shall provide devices installed and configured with start/stop, mode change, and night setback schedules as defined in the sequence of operations. As part of the installation process, the Contractor shall configure vacation, holiday, and any special event schedules as provided by the Owner. b. The system shall have the ability to program alterations to programmed operating schedules based on the priority of events and shall include the following scenario: c. Based on operator privileges, the operator shall have the ability to temporarily override the programmed schedule of equipment. Operational override of a programmed schedule shall be for a specific duration following which the schedule shall revert back to the preprogrammed schedule. 3. Display of Start and Stop Times and Actions: An operator shall be abl e to inspect the content of any schedule and determine the specific control actions that will occur at any time, on any date. For any particular device or system parameter that is the subject of a schedule, an operator shall be able to determine the schedule of actions related to that particular device or parameter. 4. Modification of Schedules: All calendar entries and schedules shall be modifiable from the EMCS or local workstation by an operator with sufficient privilege. E. Trending: 1. Trending is the accumulation of (time, value) data pairs at specified rates for a specified duration. Trends are distinguished from real -time plotting of data by the fact that the data are destined for long-term storage. 2. Archival Storage of Data: Archival storage of data will be handled by the EMCS. However, the Owner may specify local trend archiving and display through the use of BACnet Trend Log objects. 3. Modification of Trend Log Parameters: An operator with sufficient privilege shall be able to change the data points to be logged, the sampling rate, and the duration of a trend log. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 BACS COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 230901-9 F. Device and Network Management 1. Device and network management is the exchange of data between BACnet devices concerning the operation and status of specific devices. If local workstation capabilities are provided, the following functions shall be available: a. Display of Device Status Information: Operators shall be able to display at any time the operational status of any device on the network. b. Display of BACnet Object Information: Operators shall be able to display at any time any property of any BACnet object. Operators shall be able to display property values of objects grouped by object type, object location, and building system. c. Silencing Devices that are Transmitting Erroneous Data: Operators shall be able to direct a field device to stop transmitting event, alarm, or COV notifications until a subsequent command to resume transmissions is received. d. Time Synchronization: Operators shall be able to set the time and date in any device on the network that supports time-of-day functionality. The operator shall be able to select to set the time and date for an individual device or all devices on a single local network. e. Remote Device Reinitialization: Operators shall have the ability to issue reinitialization commands to any device that supports remote reinitialization. f. Backup and Restore: Operators shall have the ability to backup and restore all BACnet devices on the network that support this capability. g. Configuration Management of Half-Routers, Routers and BBMDs: Operators shall have the ability to display and modify the routing table entries in all supplied BACnet half-routers and routers and the broadcast distribution and foreign device registration tables in all BBMDs. 3.3 USE OF BACNET OBJECTS A. This clause provides requirements that are specific to the representation of data and functionality using BACnet objects. B. Naming Conventions: The following sections list the requirements for the assignment of names and identifiers for BACnet objects. 1. Device Names a. The EMCS uses a system for naming its control devices based on facility name, location within a facility, the system or systems that the device monitors and/or controls, or the area served. Names can be up to 254 characters in length, without embedded spaces. Only the characters A -Z, 0- 9, ".", and "-" may be used. The goal is the shortest descriptive, but unambiguous, name. For example, if there is only one heating water pump "P1", a valid name would be "TEGLE.HW.P1.CONTROL". Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 BACS COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 230901-10 b. If there are two pumps designated "P1", one in the basement mechanical room and one in the penthouse mechanical room, the names could be "TEAGLE.BSMT.HW.P1.CONTROL" or "TEAGLE.PENT.HW.P1 CONTROL". In the event of unitary controllers, for example a VAV box controller, a name might be “TEAGLE.122.TV-LOUNGE”. These names should be used for the value of the "Object_Name" property of the BACnet Device objects of the controllers involved so that the BACnet name and the EMCS name are the same. 2. Device Instance Numbers a. BACnet allows 4194305 device instances per BACnet internetwork, each of which must be unique. Cornell's unique device instances are formed as follows: Device Instance = "FFFFNDD" where: i. FFFF is the Facility Code (see below) ii. N is 0-9; this allows up to 10 networks per facility or building iii. DD is 00-99; this allows up to 100 devices per network b. Facility Code assignments are currently: 0000-0999 Open 1000-1999 Statutory Facilities 2000-2999 Endowed Facilities 3000-3999 Housing and Dining Facilities 4000-4999 Off-Campus Facilities 5000-5999 Utilities c. Some facilities have a facility code with an alphabetic suffix to denote wings, related structures, etc. The suffix will be ignored. Network numbers for facility codes above 4193 will be assigned in the range 0000-0999. d. The Contractor shall contact the Computer Section for assignment, or confirmation, of the Facility Code to be used prior to beginning device configuration. 3. Non-Device Object Names: Objects other than Device objects shall be named in a manner analogous to Device objects. The names shall consist of a facility.[sub- facility.]system.[sub-system.]point designation. 4. Non-Device Object Instance Numbers: The instance numbers for objects other than Device objects may be assigned at the Contractor's discretion subject only to the constraint that they be unique for a given object type within a given device. C. Commissioning/Diagnostic Mode: In order to support commissioning and troubleshooting functions, the Out_Of_Service property of all Analog, Binary, Multi - state, Loop, and Program objects shall be writable using BACnet services. D. Using Object Descriptions 1. Each Device object and every object in BACnet Building Controllers (B-BC) shall be configured with a Description property. The descriptions used shall be submitted to the Owner for approval. 2. For all object types in all devices that support Description properties, the available string length and whether or not the Description is writable using BACnet services shall be specified in the device's PICS. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 BACS COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 230901-11 E. Issues Relating to Specific BACnet Object Types 1. This clause provides requirements that pertain to the use of specific BACnet object types. 2. Analog Input, Output, and Value: All Analog_Input, Analog_Output, and Analog_Value objects shall have the capability of using the change of value (COV) reporting mechanism and the COV_Increment property shall be writable using BACnet services. 3. Binary Input: The Inactive_Text and Active_Text properties of Binary Input objects shall be configured with text string values as indicated on the points list. Binary Input objects shall support COV reporting. 4. Binary Output: The Inactive_Text and Active_Text properties of Binary Output objects shall be configured with text string values as indicated on the points list. All Binary Output objects associated with motor on/off status shall track changes of state and runtime. Binary Output objects shall support COV reporting. 5. Binary Value: The Inactive_Text and Active_Text properties of Binary Value objects shall be configured with text string values as indicated on the points list. Binary Value objects shall support COV reporting. 6. Calendar: a. Devices providing scheduling capability shall also provide at least one Calendar object with a capacity of at least ten entries. Operators shall be able to view the calendar object and make modifications from any BACnet workstation on the network. b. If the Calendar's Date_List property is writable using BACnet services, all calendar entry datatypes shall be supported. 7. Loop: All control loops using any combination of proportional, integral, and/or derivative control shall be represented by BACnet Loop objects. Operators with sufficient authority shall be able to adjust at least the Update_Interval, Setpoint, Proportional_Constant, Integral_Constant, and Derivative_Constant using BACnet services. Loop objects shall support COV reporting. 8. Multi-state Input, Output, and Value: The text to be used for the Multi-state object types shall be determined from the points list. Feedback_Value shall be determined by sensing the actual condition or mode of the device. All Multi -state objects shall support COV reporting. 9. Schedule: All building systems with date and time scheduling requirements shall have schedules represented by BACnet Schedule objects. All operators shall be able to view the entries for a schedule. Operators with sufficient privilege shall be able to modify schedule entries from any BACnet workstation. Required schedules are shown on the drawings as part of the occupied and unoccupied modes. F. Dynamic Object Creation: BACnet Building Controllers shall be configured to allow the dynamic creation of Trend Log, Calendar, and Schedule objects by means of the BACnet CreateObject service. This shall be possible from any supplied BACnet workstation by operators with appropriate authority. 3.4 USE OF BACNET SERVICES A. This clause provides requirements that are specific to the use of BACnet communication services. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 BACS COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 230901-12 B. Interoperable Commands: All dampers, valves, fans, or other mechanical equipment that may need to be controlled by more than one application shall be represented as commandable BACnet objects. The application programs interacting with this equipment shall be configured to use the command priorities listed in Table 2 (See end of this section). If implementing the sequence of operations or other required functionality requires using a command priority not list ed in Table 2, the priority assignment must be approved by the Owner. C. Alarming: This clause provides requirements that are specific to the use of BACnet for alarm processing. 1. Alarm Priorities: All alarm and event notification priorities shall be c onfigured as indicated in 3.02.B.1. 2. Notification Classes: a. The EMCS shall be designated as a recipient for all alarm notifications. b. The Priority, Ack_Required, and Recipient_List properties of Notification Class objects shall be writable over the network using BACnet services. 3. Event Notification Message Texts: Alarm and event processing shall be configured to convey descriptive text messages along with the notification. D. Operator Authority Levels: 1. Administrator - All privileges 2. Control Shop - All programming and configuration 3. Building Coordinator - Read only E. Change of Value Processing: 1. All local workstations shall be able to display property values based on the receipt of confirmed and unconfirmed Change of Value notifications. Operators shall have the ability from any workstation to subscribe to COV notifications for all objects that support COV subscriptions. 2. After initialization, all graphic display screens shall update the displayed values using COV notifications if COV notification capabilities are available from the data source. 3. The COV increment shall be adjustable by an operator using BACnet services. 3.5 LOCAL AREA NETWORKS A. This clause provides requirements that are specific to the integration of multiple BACnet networks, possibly on different LAN types, into a single BACnet "internetwork." B. Network Numbering: 1. Cornell BACnet network numbers are based on a "facility code, network" concept. The "facility code" is the Cornell-assigned numeric value assigned to a specific facility or building. The "network" typically corresponds to a "floor" or other logical configuration within the building. BACnet allows 65535 network numbers per BACnet internetwork. 2. Cornell's network numbers are thus formed as follows: Network Number = "FFFFN" where a. FFFF is the Facility Code Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 BACS COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 230901-13 b. N is 0-9; this allows up to 10 networks per facility or building 3. N = 0 will generally be assigned to a facility's BACnet Ethernet LAN. The additional N-numbers will be assigned to any ARCNET or MS/TP networks as required. 4. The Contractor shall contact the Computer Section for assignment, or confirmation, of the Network Number(s) to be used prior to beginning device configuration. C. IP Address Assignments: 1. Cornell maintains specially configured VLANs for the purpose of securely transporting BACS communication traffic. Address assignments are coordinated by the Computer Section. 2. The Contractor shall contact the Computer Section for assignment of IP addresses (and possibly non-standard UDP ports) prior to beginning device configuration. 3.6 BACNET ROUTERS A. This clause provides requirements that are specific to the use of BACnet routers. B. Error Message Destination: The Contractor shall configure each BACnet router to transmit network layer (routing) error messages to the EMCS. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 BACS COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 230901-14 Table 1. Cornell Alarm and Event Priorities Message Group Priority Range Network Priority Brief Description Life Safety 00 - 31 Life Safety Message Notifications related to an immediate threat to life, safety or health such as fire detection or armed robbery. Property Safety 32 - 63 Life Safety Message Notifications related as an immediate threat to property such as forced entry. Supervisory 64 - 95 Critical Equipment Message Notifications related to improper operation, monitoring failure (particularly of Life Safety or Property Safety monitoring), or monetary loss. Trouble 96 - 127 Critical Equipment Message Notifications related to communication failure (particularly of Life Safety or Property Safety equipment). Miscellaneous Higher Priority Alarm and Events 128 - 191 Urgent Message Higher-level notifications related to occupant discomfort, normal operation, normal monitoring, or return to normal. Miscellaneous Lower Priority Alarm and Events 192 - 255 Normal Message Lower-level notification related to occupant discomfort, normal operation, normal monitoring, or return to normal. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 BACS COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 230901-15 Table 2. Cornell Command Priorities Priority Level Application Priority Level Application 1 Manual-Life Safety 9 Available 2 Automatic-Life Safety 10 Available 3 Available 11 Load Shedding 4 Available 12 Available 5 Critical Equipment Control 13 Available 6 Minimum On/Off 14 Available 7 Available 15 Available 8 Manual Operator 16 Available END OF SECTION 230901 Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 232923-1 SECTION 232923 - VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes separately enclosed, preassembled, combination VSDs, rated 600 V and less, for speed control of three-phase, squirrel-cage induction motors. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. BAS: Building automation system. B. CE: Conformite Europeene (European Compliance). C. CPT: Control power transformer. D. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. E. LED: Light-emitting diode. F. NC: Normally closed. G. NO: Normally open. H. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device. I. PID: Control action, proportional plus integral plus derivative. J. RFI: Radio-frequency interference. K. VSD: Variable-frequency motor controller. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type and rating of VSD indicated. 1. Include dimensions and finishes for VSDs. 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 232923-2 B. Shop Drawings: For each VSD indicated. 1. Include mounting and attachment details. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, drawn to scale, showing dimensioned layout on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Required working clearances and required area above and around VSDs. 2. Show VSD layout and relationships between electrical components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. 3. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. 4. Indicate field measurements. B. Qualification Data: For testing agency. C. Product Certificates: For each VSD from manufacturer. D. Source quality-control reports. E. Field quality-control reports. F. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For VSDs to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: a. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting thermal-magnetic circuit breaker and motor-circuit protector trip settings. b. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable overload relays. c. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming microprocessor control modules. d. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable timers, controls, and status and alarm points. e. Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor nameplate, full-load currents. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 232923-3 f. Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that switch settings for motor-running overload protection suit actual motors to be protected. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store equipment in a clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace VSDs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. ABB. 2. Danfoss Inc; Danfoss Drives Div. 3. Eaton Electrical Sector; Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 4. Rockwell Automation, Inc; Allen-Bradley Brand. 5. Schneider Electric USA, Inc. 6. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 7. Yaskawa Electric America, Inc. 2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. This specification is to cover a complete Variable Frequency Drive consisting of a pulse width modulated (PWM) inverter designed for use with a standard NEMA Design B induction motor. B. The drive manufacturer shall supply the drive and all necessary options as herein specified. VFDs that are manufactured by a third party and “brand labeled” shall not be acceptable. All VFDs installed on this project shall be from the same manufacturer. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 232923-4 2.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards and Guidelines: 1. IEEE 519-1992, Guide for Harmonic Content and Control. 2. UL508(A)(C) 3. ICS 7.0, AC Adjustable Speed Drives 4. EN/IEC 61800-3 5. NEC 430.120, Adjustable-Speed Drive Systems 6. IBC 2012 Seismic – referencing ASC 7-05 and ICC AC-156 B. Qualifications: 1. VFDs and options shall be UL508 listed as a complete assembly. The base VFD shall be UL listed for 100 kA SCCR without the need for external input fuses. 2. CE Mark – The base VFD shall meet product standard EN 61800-3 for the First Environment restricted level (Category C2). (RFI / EMI Filter spec). 3. The entire VFD assembly, including the bypass (if specified), shall be seismically certified and labeled as such in accordance with the 2012 International Building Code (IBC): a. VFD manufacturer shall provide Seismic Certification and Installation requirements at time of submittal. b. Seismic importance factor of 1.5 rating is required, and shall be based upon actual shake test data as defined by ICC AC-156. c. Seismic ratings based upon calculations alone are not acceptable. Certification of Seismic rating must be based on testing done in all three axis of motion by a certified lab. d. Special seismic certification of equipment and components shall be provided by OSHPD preapproval. 2.4 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES A. The VFD package as specified herein and defined on the VFD schedule shall be enclosed in a UL Type enclosure (enclosures with only NEMA ratings are not acceptable). 1. Environmental operating conditions: -15 to 40° C (5 to 104° F) continuous. Altitude 0 to 3300 feet above sea level, less than 95%, non-condensing All circuit boards shall be coat- ed to protect against corrosion. B. All VFDs shall have the following standard features. 1. All VFDs shall have the same customer interface, including digital display, and keypad, regardless of horsepower rating. The keypad shall be removable, capable of remote mounting and allow for uploading and downloading of parameter settings as an aid for start-up of multiple VFDs. 2. The keypad shall include Hand-Off-Auto selections and manual speed control. There shall be fault reset and “Help” buttons on the keypad. The Help button shall include “on- line” assistance for programming and troubleshooting. 3. VFDs through 200 HP shall have internal chokes (reactors) providing 5% impedance to reduce the harmonics to the power line and to add protection from AC line transients. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 232923-5 4. The input current rating of the VFD shall not be greater than the output current rating. VFD’s with higher input current ratings require the upstream wiring, protection devices, and source transformers to be oversized per NEC 430.122 5. The VFD shall provide a programmable loss-of-load (broken belt / broken coupling) Form-C relay output. The drive shall be programmable to signal the loss-of-load condi- tion via a keypad warning, Form-C relay output, and / or over the serial communications bus. C. All VFDs to have the following adjustments: 1. Run permissive circuit - There shall be a run permissive circuit for damper or valve con- trol. Regardless of the source of a run command (keypad, input contact closure, time- clock control, or serial communications), the VFD shall provide a dry contact closure that will signal the damper to open (VFD motor does not operate). When the damper is fully open, a normally open dry contact (end-switch) shall close. The closed end-switch is wired to a VFD digital input and allows VFD motor operation. Two separate safety inter- lock inputs shall be provided. When either safety is opened, the motor shall be com- manded to coast to stop and the damper shall be commanded to close. 2. The VFD control shall include a programmable time delay for VFD start and a keypad indication that this time delay is active. A Form C relay output provides a contact closure to signal the VAV boxes open. This will allow VAV boxes to be driven open before the motor operates 3. The VFD shall include a fireman’s override input. The mode shall override all other in- puts (analog/digital, serial communication, and all keypad commands), except customer defined safety run interlocks, and force the motor to run at a preset speed or in a separate PID mode. D. Serial Communications 1. The VFD shall have an EIA-485 port as standard. The standard protocols shall be Mod- bus, Johnson Controls N2, Siemens Building Technologies FLN, and BACnet. The use of third party gateways and multiplexers is not acceptable. All protocols shall be “certified” by the governing authority (i.e. BTL Listing for BACnet). E. EMI / RFI filters. All VFD’s shall include EMI/RFI filters. The onboard filters shall allow the VFD assembly to be CE Marked and the VFD shall meet product standard EN 61800-3 for the First Environment restricted level (Category C2). F. DRIVE OPTIONS – Options shall be furnished and mounted by the drive manufacturer as de- fined on the VFD schedule. All optional features shall be UL Listed by the drive manufacturer as a complete assembly and carry a UL508 label. G. BYPASS – Bypasses shall be furnished and mounted by the drive manufacturer as defined on the VFD schedule. All VFD with bypass configurations shall be UL Listed by the drive manu- facturer as a complete assembly and carry a UL508 label. 1. A complete factory wired and tested bypass system consisting of a door interlocked, pad- lockable circuit breaker, output contactor, bypass contactor, and fast acting VFD input Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 232923-6 fuses. UL Listed motor overload protection shall be provided in both drive and bypass modes. 2. The bypass enclosure door and VFD enclosure must be mechanically interlocked such that the disconnecting device must be in the “Off” position before either enclosure may be accessed. 3. The VFD and bypass package shall have a UL listed short circuit current rating (SCCR) of 100,000 Amps and this rating shall be indicated on the UL data label. 4. The bypass shall maintain positive contactor control through the voltage tolerance win- dow of nominal voltage +30%, -35%. This feature is designed to avoid contactor coil failure during brown out / low line conditions and allow for input single phase operation when in the VFD mode. Designs that will not allow input single phase operation in the VFD mode are not acceptable. 5. Motor protection from single phase power conditions - the bypass system must be able to detect a single phase input power condition while running in bypass, disengage the motor in a controlled fashion, and give a single phase input power indication. Bypass systems not incorporating single phase protection in bypass mode are not acceptable. 6. The bypass system shall be designed for stand-alone operation and shall be completely functional in both Hand and Automatic modes even if the VFD has been removed from the system for repair / replacement. Serial communications shall remain functional even with the VFD removed. Bypass systems that do not maintain full functionality with the drive removed are not acceptable. 7. Serial communications – the bypass shall be capable of being monitored and / or con- trolled via serial communications. On-board communications protocols shall include ModBus RTU; Johnson Controls N2; Siemens Building Technologies FLN (P1); and BACnet MS/TP. 8. The user shall be able to select the text to be displayed on the keypad when an external safety opens. Example text display indications include “FireStat”, “FreezStat”, “Over pressure” and “Low suction”. The user shall also be able to determine which of the four (4) safety contacts is open over the serial communications connection. 9. Smoke Control Override Mode (Override 1) – The bypass shall include a dedicated digi- tal input that will transfer the motor from VFD mode to Bypass mode upon receipt of a dry contact closure from the Fire / Smoke Control System. The Smoke Control Override Mode action is not programmable and will always function as described in the bypass User’s Manual documentation. In this mode, the system will ignore low priority safeties and acknowledge high priority safeties. All keypad control, serial communications con- trol, and normal customer start / stop control inputs will be disregarded. This Smoke Control Mode shall be designed to meet the intent of UL864/UUKL. 10. Fireman’s Override Mode (Override 2) – the bypass shall include a second, programma- ble override input which will allow the user to configure the unit to acknowledge some digital inputs, all digital inputs, ignore digital inputs or any combination of the above. This programmability allows the user to program the bypass unit to react in whatever manner the local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) requires. The Override 2 action may be programmed for “Run-to-Destruction”. The user may also force the unit into Override 2 via the serial communications link. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 232923-7 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, surfaces, and substrates to receive VSDs, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine VSD before installation. Reject VSDs that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. C. Examine roughing-in for conduit systems to verify actual locations of conduit connections before VSD installation. D. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Wall-Mounting Controllers: Install with tops at uniform height and with disconnect operating handles not higher than 79 inches (2000 mm) above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structural-steel channels bolted to wall. For controllers not on walls, provide freestanding racks complying with Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." B. Seismic Bracing: Comply with requirements specified in Section 260548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components. D. Install fuses in each fusible-switch VSD. E. Install fuses in control circuits if not factory installed. Comply with requirements in Section 262813 "Fuses." F. Install heaters in thermal-overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate full-load amperes after motors are installed. G. Install, connect, and fuse thermal-protector monitoring relays furnished with motor-driven equipment. H. Comply with NECA 1. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 232923-8 3.3 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION A. Install wiring between VSDs and remote devices and facility's central-control system. Comply with requirements in Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables." B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures. C. Connect selector switches and other automatic-control devices where applicable. 1. Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic-control devices that have no safety functions when switches are in manual-control position. 2. Connect selector switches with control circuit in both manual and automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor-overload protectors. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify VSDs, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs. 2. Label each VSD with engraved nameplate. 3. Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device. B. Operating Instructions: Frame printed operating instructions for VSDs, including control sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished metal, and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of VSD units. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. C. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative. D. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. Test insulation resistance for each VSD element, bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. E. Tests and Inspections: 1. Inspect VSD, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test and adjust controllers, components, and equipment. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 232923-9 2. Test insulation resistance for each VSD element, component, connecting motor supply, feeder, and control circuits. 3. Test continuity of each circuit. 4. Verify that voltages at VSD locations are within 10 percent of motor nameplate rated voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify Owner before starting the motor(s). 5. Test each motor for proper phase rotation. 6. Perform tests according to the Inspection and Test Procedures for Adjustable Speed Drives stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 7. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 8. Perform the following infrared (thermographic) scan tests and inspections, and prepare reports: a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each VSD. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each VSD 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. c. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. 9. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. F. VSDs will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. G. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies the VSD and describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations made after remedial action. 3.6 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.7 ADJUSTING A. Program microprocessors for required operational sequences, status indications, alarms, event recording, and display features. Clear events memory after final acceptance testing and prior to Substantial Completion. B. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overload-relay pickup and trip ranges. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 232923-10 C. Adjust the trip settings of instantaneous-only circuit breakers and thermal-magnetic circuit breakers with adjustable, instantaneous trip elements. Initially adjust to 6 times the motor nameplate full-load amperes and attempt to start motors several times, allowing for motor cool- down between starts. If tripping occurs on motor inrush, adjust settings in increments until motors start without tripping. Do not exceed 8 times the motor full-load amperes (or 11 times for NEMA Premium Efficient motors if required). Where these maximum settings do not allow starting of a motor, notify Owner before increasing settings. D. Set the taps on reduced-voltage autotransformer controllers. E. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges. F. Set field-adjustable pressure switches. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions until controllers are ready to be energized and placed into service. B. Replace VSDs whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to Substantial Completion. 3.9 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, reprogram, and maintain VSDs. END OF SECTION 232923 Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 METAL DUCTS 233113 - 1 SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings. 2. Single-wall round ducts and fittings. 3. Sheet metal materials. 4. Sealants and gaskets. 5. Hangers and supports. 6. Seismic-restraint devices. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements for metal ducts. 2. Section 233116 "Nonmetal Ducts" for fibrous-glass ducts, thermoset fiber-reinforced plastic ducts, thermoplastic ducts, PVC ducts, and concrete ducts. 3. Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct- mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article. B. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of the following products: 1. Ductwork and fittings. 2. Sealants and gaskets. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 METAL DUCTS 233113 - 2 B. Shop Drawings: 1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work. 2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings. 3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, liner material, and static-pressure classes. 4. Elevation of top of ducts. 5. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines. 6. Fittings. 7. Reinforcement and spacing. 8. Seam and joint construction. 9. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions. 10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project. 11. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and panels. 12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment and vibration isolation. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Duct installation in congested spaces, indicating coordination with general construction, building components, and other building services. Indicate proposed changes to duct layout. 2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Structural members to which duct will be attached. 4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 5. Penetrations of smoke barriers and fire-rated construction. 6. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following: a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Sprinklers. e. Access panels. f. Perimeter moldings. B. Welding certificates. C. Field quality-control reports. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 METAL DUCTS 233113 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated. B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct- support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct- support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2.2 SINGLE-WALL ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated. B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 1. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches (1524 mm) in Diameter: Flanged. C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 METAL DUCTS 233113 - 4 1. Fabricate round ducts larger than 90 inches (2286 mm) in diameter with butt-welded longitudinal seams. 2. Fabricate flat-oval ducts larger than 72 inches (1830 mm) in width (major dimension) with butt-welded longitudinal seams. D. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2.3 SHEET METAL MATERIALS A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M. 1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90 (Z275). 2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized. C. PVC-Coated, Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M. 1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90 (Z275). 2. Minimum Thickness for Factory-Applied PVC Coating: 4 mils (0.10 mm) thick on sheet metal surface of ducts and fittings exposed to corrosive conditions, and minimum 1 mil (0.025 mm) thick on opposite surface. 3. Coating Materials: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use on ducts listed and labeled by an NRTL for compliance with UL 181, Class 1. D. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. 1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials. E. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches (900 mm) or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches (900 mm). 2.4 SEALANT AND GASKETS A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 METAL DUCTS 233113 - 5 B. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: 1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent. 3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water). 7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa), positive and negative. 8. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets. C. Solvent-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: 1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Base: Synthetic rubber resin. 3. Solvent: Toluene and heptane. 4. Solids Content: Minimum 60 percent. 5. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 60. 6. Water resistant. 7. Mold and mildew resistant. 8. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 9. VOC: Maximum 395 g/L. 10. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 11. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa), positive or negative. 12. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 13. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets. D. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920. 1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric. 2. Type: S. 3. Grade: NS. 4. Class: 25. 5. Use: O. 6. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 7. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." E. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 METAL DUCTS 233113 - 6 F. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals: 1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg (0.14 L/s per sq. m at 250 Pa) and shall be rated for 10-inch wg (2500-Pa) static-pressure class, positive or negative. 2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot. 3. Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated couplings and fitting spigots. 2.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts. B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation. C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1 (Table 5-1M), "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct." D. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603. E. Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492. F. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device. G. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials. H. Trapeze and Riser Supports: 1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings. B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated. C. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 METAL DUCTS 233113 - 7 D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints. E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections. F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines. G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch (25 mm), plus allowance for insulation thickness. I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures. J. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). K. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers. Comply with requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers. L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged. B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use two-part tape sealing system. C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding. D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets. E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements. 3.3 DUCT SEALING A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct Schedule" Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 METAL DUCTS 233113 - 8 B. Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible": 1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg (500 Pa) and Lower: Seal Class A. 3. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg (500 Pa): Seal Class A. 4. Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class A. 5. Unconditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class A. 6. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg (500 Pa) and Lower: Seal Class A. 7. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg (500 Pa): Seal Class A. 8. Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class A. 9. Conditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class A. 3.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports." B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached. 1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. 2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. 3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches (100 mm) thick. 4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick. 5. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints. C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1 (Table 5-1M), "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches (610 mm) of each elbow and within 48 inches (1200 mm) of each branch intersection. D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports. E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet (5 m). F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 METAL DUCTS 233113 - 9 3.5 CONNECTIONS A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories." B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Leakage Tests: 1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." Submit a test report for each test. 2. Test the following systems: a. Supply Ducts: Test representative duct sections, selected by Architect from sections installed, totaling no less than 50 percent of total installed duct area for each designated pressure class. 3. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing and for compliance with test requirements. 4. Test for leaks before applying external insulation. 5. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section being tested. If static-pressure classes are not indicated, test system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure. 6. Give seven days' advance notice for testing. 3.7 START UP A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC." 3.8 DUCT SCHEDULE A. Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel except as otherwise indicated and as follows: B. Supply Ducts: 1. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, Furnaces, Heat Pumps, and Terminal Units: a. Pressure Class: Positive 3-inch wg (750 Pa). b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 3. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 3. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 METAL DUCTS 233113 - 10 2. Ducts Connected to Constant-Volume Air-Handling Units: a. Pressure Class: Positive 3-inch wg (750 Pa). b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 3. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 3. 3. Ducts Connected to Variable-Air-Volume Air-Handling Units: a. Pressure Class: Positive 3-inch wg (750 Pa). b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 3. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 3. 4. Ducts Connected to Equipment Not Listed Above: a. Pressure Class: Positive 3-inch wg (750 Pa). b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 3. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 3. C. Exhaust Ducts: 1. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2) Air: a. Pressure Class: Negative 3-inch wg (750 Pa). b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A if negative pressure, and A if positive pressure. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 3. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 3. 2. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting Laboratory and Process (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 3 and 4) Air: a. PVC-coated, galvanized sheet steel with thicker coating on duct interior. b. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 3-inch wg (750 Pa). c. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: Welded seams, joints, and penetrations. d. SMACNA Leakage Class: 3. 3. Ducts Connected to Equipment Not Listed Above: a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 3-inch wg (750 Pa). b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A if negative pressure, and A if positive pressure. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 3. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 3. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 METAL DUCTS 233113 - 11 D. Intermediate Reinforcement: 1. Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel. 2. PVC-Coated Ducts: a. Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material. b. Not Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material. E. Elbow Configuration: 1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows." a. Velocity 1000 fpm (5 m/s) or Lower: 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes. b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm (5 to 7.6 m/s): 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. 3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." c. Velocity 1500 fpm (7.6 m/s) or Higher: 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. 3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." 2. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows." a. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. b. Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. c. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 METAL DUCTS 233113 - 12 3. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "Round Duct Elbows." a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3- 1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have proportionately fewer segments. 1) Velocity 1000 fpm (5 m/s) or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three segments for 90-degree elbow. 2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm (5 to 7.6 m/s): 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and four segments for 90-degree elbow. 3) Velocity 1500 fpm (7.6 m/s) or Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and five segments for 90-degree elbow. 4) Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5. b. Round Elbows, 12 Inches (305 mm) and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated. c. Round Elbows, 14 Inches (356 mm) and Larger in Diameter: Welded. F. Branch Configuration: 1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-6, "Branch Connection." a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry. b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in. 2. Round and Flat Oval: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct. a. Velocity 1000 fpm (5 m/s) or Lower: 90-degree tap. b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm (5 to 7.6 m/s): Conical tap. c. Velocity 1500 fpm (7.6 m/s) or Higher: 45-degree lateral. END OF SECTION 233113 Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 1 SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Manual volume dampers. 2. Control dampers. 3. Fire dampers. 4. Flange connectors. 5. Turning vanes. 6. Duct-mounted access doors. 7. Flexible connectors. 8. Flexible ducts. 9. Duct accessory hardware. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. For duct silencers, include pressure drop and dynamic insertion loss data. Include breakout noise calculations for high transmission loss casings. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which ceiling-mounted access panels and access doors required for access to duct accessories are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved. B. Source quality-control reports. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and maintenance manuals. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M. 1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90 (Z275). 2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized. B. Fibrous glass – comply with ASME?ANSI RTP-1 and PS15-69 1. Minimum ratio of 35% glass to 65% resin C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts. D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches (900 mm) or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches (900 mm). E. All duct accessories materials to match parent duct construction 2.3 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS A. Low-Leakage, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers: 1. Comply with AMCA 500-D testing for damper rating. 2. Low-leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and bearing AMCA's Certified Ratings Seal for both air performance and air leakage. 3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 4. Frames: a. Hat shaped. b. 0.094-inch- (2.4-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel. c. Mitered and welded corners. d. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts. 5. Blades: Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 3 a. Multiple or single blade. b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design. c. Stiffen damper blades for stability. d. Galvanized, roll-formed steel, 0.064 inch (1.62 mm) thick. 6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. 7. Bearings: a. Oil-impregnated bronze. b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg (750 Pa) or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. 8. Blade Seals: Neoprene. 9. Jamb Seals: Cambered stainless steel. 10. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel. 11. Accessories: a. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed position without vibration. B. Low-Leakage, Fibrous glass (FRP), Manual Volume Dampers: 1. Comply with AMCA 500-D testing for damper rating. 2. Low-leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and bearing AMCA's Certified Ratings Seal for both air performance and air leakage. 3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 4. Frames: a. Premium vinyl ester b. flanged frames for installing in ducts. 5. Blades: a. Butterfly type b. Premium vinyl ester c. Blade shall fully encapsulate shaft 6. Blade shaft: Type 316 stainless steel 7. Bearings: a. Teflon 8. Blade Seals: EPDM 9. Accessories: a. Include locking device to hold dampers in a fixed position without vibration. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 4 2.4 FIRE DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. 2. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 3. Nailor Industries Inc. 4. Prefco; Perfect Air Control, Inc. 5. Ruskin Company. 6. Vent Products Company, Inc. B. Type: Dynamic; rated and labeled according to UL 555 by an NRTL. C. Closing rating in ducts up to 4-inch wg (1-kPa) static pressure class and minimum 2000-fpm (10-m/s) velocity. D. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 hours. E. Frame: Curtain type with blades outside airstream Multiple-blade type; fabricated with roll- formed, 0.034-inch- (0.85-mm-) thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners. F. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed, galvanized sheet steel. 1. Minimum Thickness: 0.138 inch (3.5 mm) or 0.39 inch (9.9 mm) thick, as indicated, and of length to suit application. 2. Exception: Omit sleeve where damper-frame width permits direct attachment of perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor; thickness of damper frame must comply with sleeve requirements. G. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated. H. Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.024-inch- (0.61-mm) thick, galvanized sheet steel. In place of interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch- (0.85-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel blade connectors. I. Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless-steel closure spring. J. Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 165 deg F (74 deg C) rated, fusible links. 2.5 FLANGE CONNECTORS A. Description: Add-on or roll-formed, factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange connectors, gaskets, and components. B. Material: Galvanized steel. C. Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 5 2.6 TURNING VANES A. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting. 1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fibrous-glass fill. B. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Nonmetal Ducts: Fabricate curved blades of resin-bonded fiberglass with acrylic polymer coating; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting. C. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." D. Vane Construction: Single wall. E. Vane Construction: Single wall for ducts up to 48 inches (1200 mm) wide and double wall for larger dimensions. 2.7 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS A. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 7-2 (7-2M), "Duct Access Doors and Panels," and 7-3, "Access Doors - Round Duct." 1. Door: a. Double wall, rectangular. b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. c. Vision panel. d. Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inch (25-by-25-mm)butt or piano hinge and cam latches. e. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class. 2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets. 3. Number of Hinges and Locks: a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches (300 mm) Square: No hinges and two sash locks. b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches (460 mm) Square: Continuous and two sash locks. c. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches (600 by 1200 mm): Continuous and two compression latches with outside and inside handles. 2.8 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 6 B. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1. C. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 5-3/4 inches (146 mm) wide attached to two strips of 2-3/4-inch- (70-mm-) wide, 0.028-inch- (0.7-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch- (0.8-mm-) thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts. D. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene. 1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd. (880 g/sq. m). 2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch (84 N/mm) in the warp and 360 lbf/inch (63 N/mm) in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 93 deg C). E. High-Corrosive-Environment System, Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric with chemical-resistant coating. 1. Minimum Weight: 14 oz./sq. yd. (474 g/sq. m). 2. Tensile Strength: 450 lbf/inch (79 N/mm) in the warp and 340 lbf/inch (60 N/mm) in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 67 to plus 500 deg F (Minus 55 to plus 260 deg C). F. Thrust Limits: Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert with spring and insert in compression, and with a load stop. Include rod and angle-iron brackets for attaching to fan discharge and duct. 1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency. 2. Outdoor Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. 7. Coil Spring: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximum of 1/4-inch (6-mm) movement at start and stop. 2.9 FLEXIBLE DUCTS A. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, black polymer film supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; aluminized vapor-barrier film. 1. Pressure Rating: 4-inch wg (1000 Pa) positive and 0.5-inch wg (125 Pa) negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm (20 m/s). 3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 175 deg F (Minus 29 to plus 79 deg C). 4. Insulation R-Value: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. B. Flexible Duct Connectors: Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 7 1. Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm-gear action in sizes 3 through 18 inches (75 through 460 mm), to suit duct size. 2.10 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct-insulation thickness. B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts. B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel, fiberglass accessories in fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts. C. Install control dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust fan unless otherwise indicated. D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel. 1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts. 2. Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts. E. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing. F. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated. G. Install fire dampers according to UL listing. H. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and equipment at the following locations: 1. On both sides of duct coils. 2. Upstream and downstream from duct filters. 3. At outdoor-air intakes and mixed-air plenums. 4. At drain pans and seals. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 8 5. Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, backdraft dampers, and equipment. 6. Adjacent to and close enough to fire damper, to reset or reinstall fusible links. Access doors for access to fire damper having fusible links shall be pressure relief access doors and shall be outward operation for access doors installed upstream from dampers and inward operation for access doors installed downstream from dampers. 7. At each change in direction and at maximum 50-foot (15-m) spacing. 8. Upstream and downstream from turning vanes. 9. Upstream or downstream from duct silencers. 10. Control devices requiring inspection. 11. Elsewhere as indicated. I. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure. J. Access Door Sizes: 1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches (200 by 125 mm). 2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches (300 by 150 mm). 3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches (460 by 250 mm). 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches (530 by 355 mm). K. Label access doors according to Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door. L. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment. M. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg (1250 Pa) and more, cover flexible connectors with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps. N. Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly. O. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to ducts with maximum 60-inch (1500-mm) lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place. P. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands. Q. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes. R. Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on both sides of equipment. Attach thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4-inch (6-mm) movement during start and stop of fans. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: 1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement. 2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be performed. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 9 3. Operate fire dampers to verify full range of movement and verify that proper heat- response device is installed. 4. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation. 5. Operate remote damper operators to verify full range of movement of operator and damper. END OF SECTION 233300 Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS 233416 - 1 SECTION 233416 - CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: For each product. 1. Forward-curved centrifugal fans. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each fan. 2. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. 3. Certified fan sound-power ratings. 4. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories. 5. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts. 6. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For centrifugal fans to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Belts: One set(s) for each belt-driven unit. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS 233416 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. AMCA Compliance: 1. Comply with AMCA performance requirements and bear the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal. 2. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2.2 FORWARD-CURVED CENTRIFUGAL FANS A. Manufacturers: 1. Greenheck 2. Twin City 3. Cook B. Description: 1. Factory-fabricated, -assembled, -tested, and -finished, belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor, drive assembly, and support structure. 2. Deliver fans as factory-assembled units, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations. 3. Factory-installed and -wired disconnect switch. C. Housings: 1. Heavy Gauge Galvanized Steel 2. Formed panels to make curved-scroll housings with shaped cutoff. 3. Panel Bracing: Steel angle- or channel-iron member supports for mounting and supporting fan scroll, wheel, motor, and accessories. 4. Horizontally split, bolted-flange housing. 5. Spun inlet cone with flange. 6. Outlet flange. D. Forward-Curved Wheels: 1. Black-enameled or galvanized-steel construction with inlet flange, backplate, shallow blades with inlet and tip curved forward in direction of airflow. 2. Mechanically secured to flange and backplate; cast-steel hub swaged to backplate and fastened to shaft with set screws. E. Shafts: Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS 233416 - 3 1. Statically and dynamically balanced and selected for continuous operation at maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower, with adjustable alignment and belt tensioning. 2. Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with keyway. Ship with protective coating of lubricating oil. 3. Designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of first critical speed at top of fan's speed range. F. Prelubricated and Sealed Shaft Bearings: 1. Bearing Rating Life: L50 at 200,000 hours G. Vibration Isolation 1. No metal to metal contact 2. Double studded true isolators or pedestal mount H. Belt Drives: 1. Factory mounted, with adjustable alignment and belt tensioning. 2. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: 1.5 3. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at factory. 4. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 hp; fixed pitch for use with larger motors. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions. 5. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt drives. 6. Belt Guards: Fabricate to comply with OSHA and SMACNA requirements of diamond- mesh wire screen welded to steel angle frame or equivalent, prime coated. Secure to fan or fan supports without short circuiting vibration isolation. Include provisions for adjustment of belt tension, lubrication, and use of tachometer with guard in place. 7. Motor Mount: Adjustable for belt tensioning. I. Accessories: 1. Access for Inspection, Cleaning, and Maintenance: Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1. 2. Companion Flanges: Rolled flanges for duct connections of same material as housing. 3. Inlet filter: Washable one inch aluminum filter 4. Roof curb: 12” H, aluminum with 1.5” insulation 5. Disconnect Switch: NEMA 4, mounted within fan compartment and factory wired. 2.3 MOTORS A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS 233416 - 4 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal. B. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210/ASHRAE 51, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Certified Aerodynamic Performance Rating." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install centrifugal fans level and plumb. B. Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to the final location, according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points. D. Curb Support: Install roof curb on roof structure, level and secure, according to "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual," Low-Slope Membrane Roofing Construction Details Section, Illustration "Raised Curb Detail for Rooftop Air Handling Units and Ducts." Install and secure centrifugal fans on curbs, and coordinate roof penetrations and flashing with roof construction E. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance. F. Label fans according to requirements specified in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment." 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories." 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. C. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative: Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS 233416 - 5 1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches. 3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. 4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards. 5. Adjust belt tension. 6. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. 7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. 8. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in connected ductwork systems are in fully open position. 9. See Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing For HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures. 10. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. D. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Controls and equipment will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain centrifugal fans. END OF SECTION 233416 Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 1 SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables" for control systems communications cables and Classes 1, 2 and 3 control cables. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. VFC: Variable frequency controller. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing agency. B. Field quality-control reports. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division. 2. Alpha Wire. 3. Belden Inc. 4. Encore Wire Corporation. 5. General Cable Technologies Corporation. 6. Southwire Incorporated. B. Conductors shall be annealed copper; 98% conductivity. Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S- 95-658. C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Type THHN-2-THWN- 2 and Type XHHW-2. D. Conductors for building feeder and branch circuit shall be insulated for 600 volts. Conductors for signal circuits operating at less than 50 volts to ground shall be insulated for 300 volts. E. VFC Cable: 1. Comply with UL 1277, UL 1685, and NFPA 70 for Type TC-ER cable. 2. Type TC-ER with oversized crosslinked polyethylene insulation, spiral-wrapped foil plus 85 percent coverage braided shields and insulated full-size ground wire, and sunlight- and oil-resistant outer PVC jacket. 3. Comply with UL requirements for cables in Classes I and II, Division 2 hazardous location applications. 2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Gardner Bender. 3. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 4. Ideal Industries, Inc. 5. Ilsco; a branch of Bardes Corporation. 6. NSi Industries LLC. 7. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of the EGS Electrical Group. 8. 3M; Electrical Markets Division. 9. Tyco Electronics. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 3 B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated. 2.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger, except VFC cable, which shall be extra flexible stranded. 3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS A. Interior Dry Location Feeders: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway B. Wet Location Feeders: Type THWN-2, single conductors in raceway or Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway. C. VFC Output Circuits: Type XHHW-2 in metal conduit with braided shield. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables. C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway. E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 4 F. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B. B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. 1. Splices: a. Wires #8 and smaller: Pre-insulated solder-less connectors. b. Wires #6 through #4/0: Compression or split bolt type connectors c. Wires larger than #4/0: Compression or split bolt type connectors with minimum two pressure points per conductor. C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack. 3.5 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of conductor, and identify as spare conductor. 3.6 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling." 3.7 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping." 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 5 C. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test feeder conductors for compliance with requirements. 2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 3. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in conductors No. 3 AWG and larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to portable scanner. Correct deficiencies determined during the scan. a. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each splice 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. b. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. c. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies splices checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. D. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following: 1. Procedures used. 2. Results that comply with requirements. 3. Results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements. E. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. END OF SECTION 260519 Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 260523 - 1 SECTION 260523 - CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. UTP cabling. 2. RS-485 cabling. 3. Low-voltage control cabling. 4. Control-circuit conductors. 5. Identification products. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. B. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control and signaling power-limited circuits. C. Plenum: A space forming part of the air distribution system to which one or more air ducts are connected. An air duct is a passageway, other than a plenum, for transporting air to or from heating, ventilating, or air-conditioning equipment. D. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer. E. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector. B. Source quality-control reports. C. Field quality-control reports. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 260523 - 2 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-site testing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Flame Travel and Smoke Density in Plenums: As determined by testing identical products according to NFPA 262 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products for installation in plenums with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame Travel Distance: 60 inches or less. 2. Peak Optical Smoke Density: 0.5 or less. 3. Average Optical Smoke Density: 0.15 or less. B. Flame Travel and Smoke Density for Riser Cables in Non-Plenum Building Spaces: As determined by testing identical products according to UL 1666. C. Flame Travel and Smoke Density for Cables in Non-Riser Applications and Non-Plenum Building Spaces: As determined by testing identical products according to UL 1685. 2.3 BACKBOARDS A. Description: Plywood, fire-retardant treated, 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches. Comply with requirements for plywood backing panels in Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry." B. Painting: Paint plywood on all sides and edges with flat black latex paint. Comply with requirements in Section 099123 "Interior Painting." 2.4 UTP CABLE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. ADC. 2. Alpha Wire Company; a division of Belden Inc. 3. Belden Inc. 4. CommScope, Inc. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 260523 - 3 5. Draka Cableteq USA. 6. Genesis Cable Products; Honeywell International, Inc. 7. Mohawk; a division of Belden Inc. 8. Nexans; Berk-Tek Products. 9. Siemon Company (The). 10. Superior Essex Inc. 11. SYSTIMAX Solutions; a CommScope, Inc. brand. 12. 3M. 13. Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect; Tyco International Ltd. B. Description: 100-ohm, four-pair UTP. 1. Comply with ICEA S-102-700 for mechanical properties of Category 6 cables. 2. Comply with TIA-568-C.1 for performance specifications. 3. Comply with TIA-568-C.2, Category 6. 4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with NEMA WC 66, UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types: a. Communications, Riser Rated: Type CMP or Type CMR in metallic conduit installed per NFPA 70, Article 300.22, "Wiring in Ducts, Plenums, and Other Air- Handling Spaces." 2.5 UTP CABLE HARDWARE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. ADC. 2. American Technology Systems Industries, Inc. 3. Belden Inc. 4. Dynacom Inc. 5. Hubbell Incorporated. 6. Leviton Commercial Networks Division. 7. Molex Premise Networks; a division of Molex, Inc. 8. Panduit Corp. 9. Siemon Company (The). 10. Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect; Tyco International Ltd. B. General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.2, IDC type, with modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of same category or higher. C. Cross-Connect: Modular array of connecting blocks arranged to terminate building cables and permit interconnection between cables. 1. Number of Terminals per Field: One for each conductor in assigned cables. D. Jacks and Jack Assemblies: 100-ohm, balanced, twisted-pair connector; four-pair, eight-position modular. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.1. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 260523 - 4 E. Patch Cords: Factory-made, four-pair cables in 36-inch lengths; terminated with eight-position modular plug at each end. 1. Patch cords shall have bend-relief-compliant boots and color-coded icons to ensure Category 6 performance. Patch cords shall have latch guards to protect against snagging. 2. Patch cords shall have color-coded boots for circuit identification. 2.6 RS-485 CABLE A. Plenum-Rated Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP. 1. Paired, one pair and two pairs, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned-copper conductors. 2. Fluorinated ethylene propylene insulation. 3. Unshielded. 4. Fluorinated ethylene propylene jacket. 5. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262. 2.7 LOW-VOLTAGE CONTROL CABLE A. Plenum-Rated, Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP. 1. One and Multi-pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded (19x29) tinned-copper conductors. 2. PVC insulation. 3. Unshielded. 4. PVC jacket. 5. Flame Resistance: Comply with NFPA 262. 2.8 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Encore Wire Corporation. 2. General Cable Technologies Corporation. 3. Southwire Company. B. Class 1 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-2-THWN-2, in raceway, complying with UL 44 and UL 83. C. Class 2 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-2-THWN-2, in raceway, complying with UL 44 and UL 83. D. Class 3 Remote-Control and Signal Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-2-THWN-2, in raceway, complying with UL 44 and UL 83. E. Class 2 Control Circuits and Class 3 Remote-Control and Signal Circuits That Supply Critical Circuits: Circuit Integrity (CI) cable. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 260523 - 5 1. Smoke control signaling and control circuits. 2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables. B. Factory test UTP cables according to TIA-568-C.2. C. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Test cables on receipt at Project site. 1. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF RACEWAYS AND BOXES A. Comply with requirements in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for raceway selection and installation requirements for boxes, conduits, and wireways as supplemented or modified in this Section. 1. Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 2 inches wide, 3 inches high and 2-1/2 inches deep. 2. Flexible metal conduit shall not be used. B. Comply with TIA-569-B for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends between pull points. C. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows if possible. D. Raceway Installation in Equipment Rooms: 1. Position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard if a single piece of plywood is installed, or in the corner of the room if multiple sheets of plywood are installed around perimeter walls of the room. 2. Secure conduits to backboard if entering the room from overhead. 3. Extend conduits 3 inches above finished floor. 4. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor to grounding system. E. Backboards: Install backboards with 96-inch dimension vertical. Butt adjacent sheets tightly and form smooth gap-free corners and joints. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 260523 - 6 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Comply with NECA 1 and NFPA 70. B. General Requirements for Cabling: 1. Comply with TIA-568-C Series of standards. 2. Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling Systems". 3. Terminate all conductors and optical fibers; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross-connect and patch panels. 4. Cables may not be spliced. 5. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals. 6. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling Systems". Install lacing bars and distribution spools. 7. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable. 8. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Do not use heat lamps for heating. 9. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling Systems". Monitor cable pull tensions. 10. Support: Do not allow cables to lay on removable ceiling tiles. 11. Secure: Fasten securely in place with hardware specifically designed and installed so as to not damage cables. C. UTP Cable Installation: 1. Comply with TIA-568-C.2. 2. Install termination hardware as required. 3. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch at the point of termination to maintain cable geometry. D. Installation of Control-Circuit Conductors: 1. Install wiring in raceways. Comply with requirements specified in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems." E. Open-Cable Installation: 1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment. 2. Suspend copper cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 8 inches above ceilings by cable supports not more than 30 inches apart. 3. Cable shall not be run through or on structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items. Do not run cables between structural members and corrugated panels. F. Separation from EMI Sources: Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 260523 - 7 1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA-569-B recommendations for separating unshielded copper voice and data communications cable from potential EMI sources including electrical power lines and equipment. 2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches. b. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches. c. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches. 3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches. b. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches. c. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches. 4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement. b. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches. c. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches. 5. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or 5 HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches. 6. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches. 3.4 REMOVAL OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Remove abandoned conductors and cables. Abandoned conductors and cables are those installed that are not terminated at equipment and are not identified for future use with a tag. 3.5 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS A. Minimum Conductor Sizes: 1. Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits; No 14 AWG. 2. Class 2 low-energy, remote-control, and signal circuits; No. 16 AWG. 3. Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm, and signal circuits; No. 12 AWG. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 260523 - 8 3.6 FIRESTOPPING A. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping." B. Comply with TIA-569-B, Annex A, "Firestopping." C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping" Chapter. 3.7 GROUNDING A. For data communication wiring, comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A and with BICSI TDMM, "Bonding and Grounding (Earthing)" Chapter. B. For low-voltage control wiring and cabling, comply with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." 3.8 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Identify data and communications system components, wiring, and cabling according to TIA- 606-A; label printers shall use label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks complying with UL 969. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. C. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Visually inspect UTP cable jacket materials for UL or third-party certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations to confirm color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections to confirm compliance with TIA-568-C.1. 2. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components. 3. Test UTP cabling for direct-current loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not after cross-connection. a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA-568-C.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 260523 - 9 that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration. D. Document data for each measurement. Print data for submittals in a summary report that is formatted using Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM as a guide, or transfer the data from the instrument to the computer, save as text files, print, and submit. E. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. F. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 260523 Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 1 SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment. B. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment, plus the following special applications: 1. Ground bonding common with lightning protection system. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor. B. Field quality-control reports. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Burndy; Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems. 2. Dossert; AFL Telecommunications LLC. 3. ERICO International Corporation. 4. Fushi Copperweld Inc. 5. Galvan Industries, Inc.; Electrical Products Division, LLC. 6. Harger Lightning and Grounding. 7. ILSCO. 8. O-Z/Gedney; A Brand of the EGS Electrical Group. 9. Robbins Lightning, Inc. 10. Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc. 2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. 2.3 CONDUCTORS A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction. B. Bare Copper Conductors: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter. 4. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 5. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. 2.4 CONNECTORS A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 3 C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions. D. Bus-Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression-type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATIONS A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated. B. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors. 3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits. B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70: 1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. 3. Receptacle circuits. 4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 6. Flexible raceway runs. 7. Armored and metal-clad cable runs. C. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping. D. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components. E. Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply circuit raceway with a nonmetallic raceway fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 4 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. B. Ground Bonding Common with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electrical power system ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode conductor, and install in conduit. C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. 2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. 3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp. D. Grounding and Bonding for Piping: 1. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve. E. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. C. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. D. Tests and Inspections: 1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 5 3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal. a. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81. E. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. F. Prepare test and inspection reports. G. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values: 1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms. 2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms. 3. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms. H. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. END OF SECTION 260526 Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 1 SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents. C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Steel slotted support systems. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 2 B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following: 1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. 3. Equipment supports. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Welding certificates. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc. c. ERICO International Corporation. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. f. Unistrut; Atkore International. g. Wesanco, Inc. 2. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4 3. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria. B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101. C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 3 riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron. E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Hilti, Inc. 2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 3) MKT Fastening, LLC. 4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. 2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. 3) Hilti, Inc. 4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC. 3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58. 4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element. 5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter. B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter. C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. 1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps. D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1- 1/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports. 3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article. B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70. C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb (90 kg). D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. 3. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 4. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches (100 mm) thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick. 5. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock washers and nuts. 6. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 5 7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate. E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars. 3.3 PAINTING A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm). B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Section 099000 "Painting" for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal. C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 260529 Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 1 SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 2. Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 4. Surface raceways. 5. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets. B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved: 1. Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports. 2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with common supports. B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer. C. Source quality-control reports. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Allied Tube & Conduit. 3. Anamet Electrical, Inc. 4. Electri-Flex Company. 5. O-Z/Gedney. 6. Picoma Industries. 7. Republic Conduit. 8. Robroy Industries. 9. Southwire Company. 10. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 11. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation. 12. Wheatland Tube Company. B. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. Comply with TIA-569-B. C. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. D. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797. E. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel. F. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360. G. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B. 1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and NFPA 70. 2. Fittings for EMT: a. Material: Steel. b. Type: Compression. 3. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper. H. Joint Compound for GRC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 3 2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Anamet Electrical, Inc. 3. Arnco Corporation. 4. CANTEX Inc. 5. CertainTeed Corporation. 6. Condux International, Inc. 7. Electri-Flex Company. 8. Kraloy. 9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 10. Niedax-Kleinhuis USA, Inc. 11. RACO; Hubbell. 12. Thomas & Betts Corporation. B. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. Comply with TIA-569-B. C. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated. D. LFNC: Comply with UL 1660. E. Fittings for RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material. F. Fittings for LFNC: Comply with UL 514B. G. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less, respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). H. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 2.3 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Hoffman. 3. Mono-Systems, Inc. 4. Square D. B. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 4 1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. D. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type unless otherwise indicated. E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. 2.4 SURFACE RACEWAYS A. Listing and Labeling: Surface raceways and tele-power poles shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. Comply with TIA-569-B. B. Surface Nonmetallic Raceways: Two- or three-piece construction, complying with UL 5A, and manufactured of rigid PVC with texture and color selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. Product shall comply with UL 94 V-0 requirements for self-extinguishing characteristics. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Hubbell Incorporated. b. Mono-Systems, Inc. c. Panduit Corp. d. Wiremold / Legrand. 2.5 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Adalet. 2. Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse-Hinds. 3. EGS/Appleton Electric. 4. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company. 5. FSR Inc. 6. Hoffman. 7. Hubbell Incorporated. 8. Kraloy. 9. Milbank Manufacturing Co. 10. Mono-Systems, Inc. 11. O-Z/Gedney. 12. RACO; Hubbell. 13. Robroy Industries. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 5 14. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. 15. Stahlin Non-Metallic Enclosures. 16. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 17. Wiremold / Legrand. B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Comply with TIA-569-B. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations. C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A. D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed cover. E. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C. F. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb (23 kg). Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb (23 kg) shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight. G. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. H. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, cast aluminum with gasketed cover. I. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box. J. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep (100 mm square by 60 mm deep) and 4 inches by 2-1/8 inches by 2-1/8 inches deep (100 mm by 60 mm by 60 mm deep). K. Gangable boxes are allowed. L. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 and Type 3R with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel. M. Cabinets: 1. NEMA 250, Type 1 and Type 3R galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. 6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 6 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed Conduit: GRC. 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: GRC. 3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 4. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R. B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: RNC & EMT. Provide RNC for exposed raceways located in 4th floor finished areas. EMT shall be provided for exposed raceways in Electrical Closets. 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: RNC & EMT. Provide RNC for exposed raceways located in 4th floor finished areas. EMT shall be provided for exposed raceways in Electrical Closets. 3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC. Raceway locations include the following: a. Mechanical rooms. 4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. 6. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC. 7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 nonmetallic in institutional damp or wet locations. C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch (21-mm) trade size. D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 2. EMT: Use compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 3. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with NEMA FB 2.20. E. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings. F. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F (49 deg C). Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 7 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors. B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot- water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. D. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports. E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab. F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches (300 mm) of changes in direction. G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines. H. Support conduit within 12 inches (300 mm)of enclosures to which attached. I. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings: 1. Use EMT for raceways. 2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or in an enclosure. J. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions. K. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG. L. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch (35mm) trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch (41-mm) trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits. M. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more. N. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path. O. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch (53-mm) trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 8 P. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use. Q. Surface Raceways: 1. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inch (50-mm)radius control at bend points. 2. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not exceeding 48 inches (1200 mm) and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section. Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods. R. Pathways for Communications Cable: Install pathways, metal and nonmetallic, rigid and flexible, as follows: 1. 3/4-Inch (21-mm) Trade Size and Smaller: Install pathways in maximum lengths of 50 feet (15 m). 2. 1-Inch (27-mm) Trade Size and Larger: Install pathways in maximum lengths of 75 feet (23m). 3. Install a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of pathway unless drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes or terminations of distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these requirements. S. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70. T. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations. 2. Where a raceway enters a building or structure. 3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. U. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings. V. Expansion-Joint Fittings: 1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F (17 deg C) and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet (7.6 m). Install in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F (55 deg C) and that has straight-run length that exceeds 100 feet (30 m). 2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations: Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 9 a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F (70 deg C) temperature change. b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F (86 deg C) temperature change. c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F (70 deg C) temperature change. 3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F (0.06 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C) of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F (0.0115 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C) of temperature change for metal conduits. 4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints. 5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement. W. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches (1830 mm) of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. 1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage. X. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated. Y. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box. Z. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel. AA. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes. BB. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose. CC. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits. 3.3 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling." Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 10 3.4 FIRESTOPPING A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping." 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 260533 Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 1 SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Identification for raceways. 2. Identification of power and control cables. 3. Identification for conductors. 4. Warning labels and signs. 5. Instruction signs. 6. Equipment identification labels. 7. Miscellaneous identification products. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated. B. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style, mounting provisions, and graphic features of identification products. C. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and IEEE C2. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145. D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels. E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 2 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors. D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 POWER AND CONTROL RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway size. B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: 1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage. C. Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label. 2.2 ARMORED AND METAL-CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each cable size. B. Colors for Cables Carrying Circuits at 600 V and Less: 1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage. C. Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label. D. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; 2 inches wide; compounded for outdoor use. E. Heat-Shrink Preprinted Tubes: Flame-retardant polyolefin tube with machine-printed identification label. Sized to suit diameter of and shrinks to fit firmly around cable it identifies. Full shrink recovery at a maximum of 200 deg F. Comply with UL 224. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 3 2.3 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each cable size. B. Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label. 2.4 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide. 2.5 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145. B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated. C. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends: 1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." 2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES." 2.6 INSTRUCTION SIGNS A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20 sq. inches and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes. 1. Engraved legend with white letters on black face. 2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners. 3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment. 2.7 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS A. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white letters on a black background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. B. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a black background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 4 2.8 CABLE TIES A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. 4. Color: Black except where used for color-coding. B. UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. 4. Color: Black. C. Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self locking. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi. 3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0. 4. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F. 5. Color: Black. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior). B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 5 E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate. F. Attach plastic raceway and cable labels that are not self-adhesive type with clear vinyl tape with adhesive appropriate to the location and substrate. G. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas. H. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below: 1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon. 2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated. I. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE A. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits More Than 30 A, and 120 V to ground: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl label. Install labels at 30-foot maximum intervals. B. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows: 1. Emergency Power. 2. Power. 3. UPS. C. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase. 1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded feeder and branch-circuit conductors. a. Color shall be factory applied. b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits: 1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. 3) Phase C: Blue. 4) Neutral: White 5) Grounding Conductor: Green Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 6 c. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits: 1) Phase A: Brown. 2) Phase B: Orange. 3) Phase C: Yellow. 4) Neutral: Gray 5) Grounding Conductor: Green d. Colors for 240/120-V Circuits: 1) Phase A: Black 2) Phase B: Orange (wild leg) 3) Phase C: Blue 4) Neutral: White 5) Grounding Conductor: Green e. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings. D. Control-Circuit Conductor Identification: For conductors and cables in pull and junction boxes, self-adhesive vinyl labels with the conductor or cable designation, origin, and destination. E. Control-Circuit Conductor Termination Identification: For identification at terminations provide self-adhesive vinyl labels with the conductor designation. F. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags to conductors and list source. G. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections. 1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation. 2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections. 3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. H. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self- adhesive warning labels. 1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. 2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. 3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of equipment including, but not limited to, the following: a. Power transfer switches. b. Controls with external control power connections. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 7 I. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation. J. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification. 1. Labeling Instructions: a. Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- high letters on 1-1/2-inch- high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high. b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label and stenciled legend 4 inches high. c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor. d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure. 2. Equipment to Be Labeled: a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. d. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary. e. Emergency system boxes and enclosures. f. Motor-control centers. g. Enclosed switches. h. Enclosed circuit breakers. i. Enclosed controllers. j. Variable-speed controllers. k. Push-button stations. l. Contactors. m. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices. n. Monitoring and control equipment. END OF SECTION 260553 Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 1 SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 2. Weather-resistant receptacles. 3. Snap switches. 4. Cord and plug sets. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter. C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor. D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference. 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations. 2. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates. C. Samples: If requested by engineer, provide one for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 2 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality-control reports. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing- label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: 1. Cooper Wiring Devices; Division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). 2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). 3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). 4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour). B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted under the following conditions: 1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire. 2. Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section. 2.3 STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Cooper; CR5362 (duplex). b. Hubbell; HBL5352 (duplex). Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 3 c. Leviton; 5352 (duplex). d. Pass & Seymour; 5362 (duplex). 2.4 GFCI RECEPTACLES A. General Description: 1. Straight blade, non-feed-through type. 2. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596. 3. Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer provides proper GFCI protection. B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Cooper; VGF20. b. Hubbell; GFR5352L. c. Pass & Seymour; 2095. d. Leviton; 7590. 2.5 CORD AND PLUG SETS A. Description: 1. Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of equipment being connected. 2. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; with green-insulated grounding conductor and ampacity of at least 130 percent of the equipment rating. 3. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for connection. 2.6 TOGGLE SWITCHES A. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896. B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Single Pole: 2) Cooper; AH1221. 3) Hubbell; HBL1221. 4) Leviton; 1221-2. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 4 5) Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC1. 2.7 WALL PLATES A. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices. 1. Plate-Securing Screws: As recommended by wall plate manufacturer. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: Refer to Corrosion Resistant Electrical Materials Note on Contract Drawings. B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather- resistant thermoplastic with hinged cover. 2.8 FINISHES A. Device Color: 1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing. B. Wall Plate Color: Refer to Corrosion Resistant Electrical Materials Note on Contract Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise indicated. B. Coordination with Other Trades: 1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes. 2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables. 3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. 4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete. C. Conductors: 1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on devices. 2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 5 3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails. 4. Existing Conductors: a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough. D. Device Installation: 1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were installed before building finishing operations were complete. 2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors. 3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment. 4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches (152 mm) in length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw. 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact. E. Receptacle Orientation: 1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the right. F. Device Plates: Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening. G. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use hot, stamped, or engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 6 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. 2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement. B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles: 1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above. C. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 262726 Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 1 SECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fusible switches. 2. Nonfusible switches. 3. Enclosures. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes. 1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Current and voltage ratings. 3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate). 4. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components. B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency. B. Field quality-control reports. 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 2 C. Manufacturer's field service report. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit breakers. 2. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type. 2. Fuse Pullers: Two for each size and type. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing. B. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from single manufacturer. C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. E. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 3 1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C) and not exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C). 2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2010 m). B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service. 2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service. 3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written permission. 4. Comply with NFPA 70E. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. C. Accessories: 1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors. 2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 3. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified. 4. Lugs: Compression type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 4 2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. C. Accessories: 1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors. 2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 3. Lugs: Compression type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material. 2.3 ENCLOSURES A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location. 1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated. B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components. C. Install fuses in fusible devices. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 5 D. Comply with NECA 1. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs. 2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. C. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. D. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. E. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports: a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. c. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. Cornell University IPD Project # 13-7700A Snee Hall - Clean Room Heat Recovery April 2017 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 6 4. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. F. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. G. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 262816